Comsphere 3800 PLUS MODEMS USER’S GUIDE

Comsphere 3800 PLUS MODEMS USER’S GUIDE
COMSPHERE
3800PLUS MODEMS
USER’S GUIDE
Document No. 3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
COMSPHERE
3800Plus Modems
User’s Guide
3980-A2-GB30-20
3rd Edition (November 1996)
Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to
this manual.
For the 3810Plus and 3820Plus standalone modems the Universal Service Order Code (USOC) for Permissive mode is
RJ11C. The Canadian equivalent to the USOC is CA11. For the 3811Plus carrier-mounted modem the USOC for
Permissive mode is RJ21X. The Canadian equivalent to the USOC is CA21A.
Warranty, Sales, and Service Information
Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed. For additional information concerning warranty,
sales, service, repair, installation, documentation, or training, use one of the following methods:
• Via the Internet: Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http://www.paradyne.com
• Via Telephone: Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company
representative.
— Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-870-2221
— International, call 813-530-2340
Trademarks
All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks or registered service
marks of their respective owners.
Printed on recycled paper
COPYRIGHT E 1996 Paradyne Corporation. All rights reserved.
This publication is protected by federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties
without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation, 8545 126th Avenue North, P.O. Box 2826, Largo, Florida 33779-2826.
Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability
or fitness for a particular purpose. Further, Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents
hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes.
A
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
1.
Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or
included in the manual.
2.
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable
operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings
must not be blocked or covered.
3.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where
persons will walk on the power cord.
4.
Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may
expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
5.
General purpose cables are provided with this product. Special cables, which may be
required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site, are the
responsibility of the customer.
6.
When installed in the final configuration, the product must comply with the applicable
Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed. If
necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection
authorities to ensure compliance.
7.
Input power to this product must be provided by one of the following: (1) a UL Listed,
CSA Certified power source with a Class 2 or Limited Power Source (LPS) output for
use in North America, or (2) a certified power source with a Safety Extra Low Voltage
(SELV) output for use in the country of installation.
In addition, if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits, take the
following precautions:
–
–
–
–
–
–
3980-A2-GB30-20
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed
for wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm.
There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
November 1996
B
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Notices
Government Requirements and Equipment Return
Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to modem connection to the public
switched telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual. Specific
instructions are listed in the following sections.
Note that 3810Plus, 3811Plus, and 3820Plus are the model names for the model numbers 3980,
3981, and 3982, respectively. The modems collectively are called 3800Plus modems.
United States
Notice to Users of the Public Switched Telephone Network
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for
this equipment. The label is located on the bottom of the Model 3810Plus and 3820Plus modems
and on the circuit card assembly of the Model 3811Plus. If requested, this information must be
provided to the telephone company.
2. Page A of this manual contains the Universal Service Order Codes (USOC) associated with the
services on which the equipment is to be connected.
C
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Government Requirements
3. The Ringer Equivalence (REN) is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be
connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices
not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should
not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as
determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum RENs
for the calling area.
4. If the 3800Plus modem causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify
you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is
not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will
be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will
provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain
uninterrupted service.
6. If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact your sales or service representative
(as appropriate) for repair or warranty information. If the product needs to be returned to the
company service center for repair, contact them directly for return instructions using one of the
following methods:
• Via the Internet: Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http://www.paradyne.com
• Via Telephone: Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to
speak with a company representative.
— Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-870-2221
— International, call 813-530-2340
If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that
you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
7. The user is not authorized to repair or modify the equipment.
8. This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company.
Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public utility
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.)
9. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a
computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such a
message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first
page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent, and an identification of the business, or other
entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of such business, or
other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information, follow the steps outlined in the manual supplied with your
fax software.
10. An FCC compliant telephone cord with modular plugs may be provided with this equipment. This
equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a
compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
D
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Canada
Notice to Users of the Canadian Public Switched Telephone Network
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This
certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will
operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a
single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly
(telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power
utility, telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together.
This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections
themselves, but should contact the appropriate
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as
appropriate.
The Load Number for this equipment is on the label on the modem. The Load Number (LN)
assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a
telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load
Numbers of all devices does not exceed 100.
If your equipment is in need of repair, refer to the procedure in the Government Requirements and
Equipment Return section.
E
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Table of Contents
Preface
Objectives and Reader Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
1. Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMSPHERE Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
2. 3810Plus and 3820Plus Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus and 3820Plus Modem Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus and 3820Plus Modem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial-Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus 4-Wire/2-Wire Leased-Line Network Connection . . . . . . . . .
3820Plus 2-Wire Leased-Line Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Management System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing 3810Plus and 3820Plus Modems . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
3. 3811Plus Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3811Plus Modem Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3811Plus Modem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing 3811Plus Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-4
i
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
4. Front Panel Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Factory Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-4
4-6
4-11
5. Call Setup Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Call Setup Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
6. Status Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Status Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
7. Test Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Test Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
8. Configure Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8-4
8-7
8-42
9. Control Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Control Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Automatic Firmware Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
10. Remote Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Remote Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11. Security
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Password Entry Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Table Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
November 1996
11-1
11-4
11-11
11-12
3980-A2-GB30-20
Table of Contents
12. Fax Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Fax Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
13. AT Command Set and S-Registers
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Register List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13-1
13-2
13-2
13-14
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
H-1
Appendices
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Result Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCITT V.25bis Dialing Commands and Responses . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary
Index
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
iii
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
List of Figures
Figure
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
3-1
3-2
4-1
4-2
4-3
5-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
8-1
8-2
E-1
E-2
iv
Page
3810Plus and 3820Plus Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3820Plus Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3600 Hubbing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3811Plus Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a 3811Plus Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus and 3820Plus DCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional SDCP, 3811Plus Faceplate, and Optional SDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3800Plus LCD and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Analog Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Digital Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Digital Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern Test and Remote Digital Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End-to-End Pattern Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCP Configuration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT Command Configuration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VF Pin Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram — 8-Position to 6-Position Crossover Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
November 1996
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
3-2
3-3
4-1
4-2
4-4
5-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-6
8-2
8-3
E-3
E-4
3980-A2-GB30-20
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
5-1
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
13-1
13-2
B-1
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
D-1
E-1
E-2
F-1
F-2
G-1
3980-A2-GB30-20
Page
3800Plus DCP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDCP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Level Menu Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Operational Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Access Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valid Dial Command Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTE Interface Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTE Dialer Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Dialer Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Line Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leased Line Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Password Table Group Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Answer Security Group Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Originate Security Group Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Database Table Using VF-Side Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Database Table Using DTE-Side Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Database Table Using Both VF-Side and DTE-Side Password . . . . . . . . .
Security Database Table Using Paired VF-Side and DTE-Side Passwords . . . . . . .
3800Plus AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3800Plus S-Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Result Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem – DTE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem – VF Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leased-Line Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Backup Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications for COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA-232-D Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VF Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V.25bis Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V.25bis Response Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory Default Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
November 1996
4-3
4-4
4-7
4-10
4-10
5-6
8-7
8-14
8-19
8-23
8-27
8-31
8-37
8-39
8-42
11-7
11-8
11-9
11-12
11-13
11-13
11-14
13-3
13-14
B-1
C-1
C-2
C-2
C-4
C-4
C-4
D-1
E-2
E-3
F-4
F-5
G-1
v
Preface
Objectives and Reader
Assumptions
Appendix C provides instructions for performing
diagnostic tests when data communications problems
occur.
This manual describes how to install and operate the
3810Plus, 3820Plus (standalone), and 3811Plus
(carrier-mounted) modems. The reader is assumed to have
a basic understanding of modems and their operation.
Appendix D provides technical specifications for
3800Plus modems.
Appendix E provides EIA RS-232 and VF TELCO pin
assignments, and auxiliary cable diagrams.
Appendix F provides V.25bis dialing information.
How to Use This Manual
Chapter 1 provides information about the features of
3800Plus modems.
Appendix G provides a list of all default configuration
options available for the four non-cellular factory preset
configurations: Async Dial, Sync Dial, Sync Leased, and
UNIXr Dial.
Chapters 2 provides instructions for installing
3810Plus and 3820Plus modems.
Appendix H is an equipment list for 3800Plus
modems, including optional features and cables.
Chapters 3 provides instructions for installing
3811Plus modems.
The Glossary provides a description of terms used
throughout this manual.
Chapter 4 provides the information required to operate
the Model 3810Plus and 3820Plus using the front panel
and the Model 3811Plus using the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier’s shared diagnostic control
panel (SDCP).
The removable Quick Reference contains key
information from throughout the manual.
Chapters 5 through 11 describe the seven branches of
the front panel command sets: Call Setup, Status, Test,
Configure, Control, Remote, and Security.
Chapter 12 provides general information about
operating 3800Plus modems in fax mode.
Chapter 13 provides instructions for displaying and
changing AT commands and S-Registers.
Related Documents
3000-A2-GA31
COMSPHERE 3000 Series
Carrier, Installation Manual
3610-A2-GZ45
3600 Hubbing Device, Feature
Number 3600-F3-300,
Installation Instructions
6700-A2-GY31
COMSPHERE 6700 Series
Network Management System
User’s Guide
Appendix A provides a menu tree for 3800Plus
modems.
Appendix B provides a list and description of result
codes issued by 3800Plus modems.
3980-A2-GB30-20
Call your service representative to order additional
product documentation.
November 1996
vii
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMSPHERE Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview
The COMSPHEREr 3810Plus, 3820Plus, and
3811Plus modems, extensions of the award-winning
COMSPHERE 3800 Series, are a new generation of
full-feature, high-speed dial modems that offer reliable
asynchronous and synchronous operation over dial- or
leased-lines networks. The 3800Plus modems’ software
defineability allows for the addition of future
enhancements and features.
Through their downloading capability, 3800Plus
modems can be upgraded to the latest firmware, requiring
no new hardware investment or on-site personnel, and
little or no downtime. These modems support a wide
range of modulation schemes and offer control using
either AT commands, the user-friendly diagnostic control
panel (DCP) or the optional COMSPHERE 6700 Series
Network Management System (NMS). The NMS
performs extensive monitoring, testing, reporting, and
restoral functions to assist in managing your network.
High-speed data transfer and reliable throughput at line
rates as high as 33,600 bps over dial lines is achieved by
employing the latest techniques in CCITT V.42bis/MNP
Class 5 data compression and CCITT V.42/MNP error
correction. The modems can send data to the DTE at
speeds as high as 115,200 bps.
The 3800Plus modem is extremely versatile when used
in modem pooling environments; it allows multiple users
to temporarily customize modem settings, thereby
permitting communication with the calling modem. Upon
disconnection, the 3800Plus modem falls back to its
original configuration settings and resumes normal
operation.
The modem’s compatibility with a number of dialing
methods and protocols, such as asynchronous AT
commands, CCITT V.25bis dialing, and the user-friendly
diagnostic control panel (DCP), permits the 3800Plus
3980-A2-GB30-20
1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
modem to be used in a variety of applications and
environments while also allowing control over modem
configuration, dialing, and diagnostics. The 3800Plus
modems offer preset factory configurations containing the
most often used modem settings. These factory presets
provide quick configuration for any asynchronous or
synchronous dial, synchronous leased, UNIXr
hardware-based dial, or cellular environments.
The 3810Plus is a 4-wire/2-wire standalone modem;
the 3820Plus is a 2-wire standalone modem; the 3811Plus
is a carrier-mounted version of the 3810Plus.
Features
The 3800Plus modems have a wide variety of features.
• Dial-Line Modulations: Proprietary extensions of
V.34 (33,600 and 31,200 bps), ITU-T V.34 (up to
28,800 bps), V.34terbo (19,200 and 16,800 bps),
CCITT V.32bis (up to 14,400 bps), V.32 (up to
9600 bps), V.22bis (2400 bps), V.22 (1200 bps),
V.21 (300 bps), Bell 212A (1200 bps), and
Bell 103J (300 bps).
• Four-wire Leased-Line Modulations: Proprietary
extensions of V.34 (33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400,
24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000,
9600, 7200, 4800, and 2400 bps), V.32terbo
(19,200 and 16,800 bps), V.32bis (14,400, 12,000,
9600, 7200, and 4800 bps), V.32 (9600 and
4800 bps), and V.22bis (2400 bps).
• Two-wire Leased-Line Modulations: Proprietary
extensions of V.34 (33,600 and 31,200 bps), ITU-T
V.34 (up to 28,800), V.32terbo (19,200 and
16,800 bps), V.32bis (14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200,
and 4800 bps), V.32 (9600 and 4800 bps), and
V.22bis (2400 bps).
November 1996
1-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
• Class 1 and Class 2 Group III Fax modulations:
CCITT V.17 (14,400, 12,000, 9600, and 7200 bps),
V.29 (9600 and 7200 bps), and V.27ter (4800 and
2400 bps).
• Convenient migration to new or optional features
through software downloading.
• CCITT V.42bis and MNP Class 5 data compression.
• Virtual error free data integrity with CCITT V.42
and MNP Level 4 error control.
• Automatic and manual single call dial backup and
dial standby capabilities for 2-wire and 4-wire
leased-line applications.
• A unique Paradyne modem pooling feature that
preserves the answering modem’s permanent
configuration, but allows multiple users to
temporarily adapt parameters for individual
requirements.
• Complement of self-tests, local and remote
loopbacks including CCITT compatible V.54.
• Seven factory-defined configurations and two
user-defined configuration areas.
• Originate Security and three Answer Security
modes which guard against unwanted user access to
the host DTE.
• Directory #1 Callback capability.
Options
3800Plus modems also may have the following
optional features:
• Leased-Line Modulations: CCITT V.33 (14,400 and
12,000 bps) and CCITT V.29 (9600, 7200, and
4800 bps).
• Extended Security, permitting up to
3,000 passwords (3811Plus only).
• Dial-line data rates from 300 bps–33,600 bps.
Leased-line rates from 2400 bps–33,600 bps.
• Asynchronous dial DTE data rates from
300 bps–115,200 bps.
• A diagnostic control panel (DCP) that displays the
connect status, data rate, type of error control or
compression, test results, alarm status of DTE or
VF parameters for both local and remote modems.
COMSPHERE Models
The COMSPHERE high-speed modem is available in
several models.
• Storage of up to 10 telephone numbers to directory
locations.
• The 3810Plus, a 4-wire/2-wire standalone unit
capable of operation on 2-wire dial, or 4-wire
leased or 2-wire leased lines.
• Compatibility with the industry de facto standard
AT Command set.
• The 3820Plus, a 2-wire standalone unit capable of
operation on 2-wire dial or 2-wire leased lines.
• Dialing via DCP, AT commands, DTR, or CCITT
V.25bis commands.
• The 3811Plus, a 4-wire/2-wire carrier-mounted
modem for installation into a COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier; it is capable of operation on
dial, or 4-wire leased or 2-wire leased lines.
• Configuration of software options via the AT
Command set or DCP.
• High-speed transmission using asynchronous,
synchronous, or UNIX devices over full- or
half-duplex dial networks or 2-wire/4-wire leased
lines.
1-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
3810Plus and 3820Plus Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus and 3820Plus Modem Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer-Supplied Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus and 3820Plus Modem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting 3810Plus and 3820Plus Modems with Supplied Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial-Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus 4-Wire/2-Wire Leased-Line Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3820Plus 2-Wire Leased-Line Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Management System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing 3810Plus and 3820Plus Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview
The standalone 3810Plus modem (Figure 2-1) is
capable of either dial or 4-wire/2-wire leased-line
operation; the standalone 3820Plus modem (Figure 2-1) is
capable of either dial or 2-wire leased-line operation.
Either modem is controlled using AT commands or the
diagnostic control panel (DCP). The DCP consists of an
LCD which displays selections, three function keys and
four directional keys which allow you to maneuver and
choose DCP selections, and a row of 13 LED status
indicators which display modem activity. For a better
understanding of DCP operation, refer to Chapter 3, Front
Panel Operation.
The rear of the 3810Plus modem contains an ON/Off
power switch, a low voltage power connector, an 8-pin
modular jack for leased-line connection, an 8-pin modular
jack for dial-line connection, a 4-pin modular jack for
network management, and a DB-25-S DTE connector.
The 3820Plus has a single 8-pin modular jack which is
used for leased-line or dial-line connection.
3980-A2-GB30-20
2
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
3810Plus and 3820Plus
Modem Package
After opening the modem’s package, check for damage
and verify that the following items are present:
• 3810Plus or 3820Plus modem
• Power supply
• One 6-position modular cord
• One 8-position modular cord
• User’s Guide
If any hardware components are damaged, notify your
service representative. Return equipment using procedures
described in the Government Requirements and
Equipment Return section near the beginning of this book.
November 1996
2-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
DIAGNOSTIC
CONTROL
POWER
SUPPLY
LCD AND
STATUS
LEASED
(3810Plus ONLY)
DIAL
(OR LEASED
FOR 3820Plus)
DTE 1
NMS
POWER IN
POWER
ON/OFF
496-14678-01
Figure 2-1. 3810Plus and 3820Plus Modem
Customer-Supplied Equipment
The following customer-supplied equipment may be
required to complete a data communications system using
the 3810Plus or 3820Plus modem:
• A DTE with an available RS-232D serial port.
• A standard RS-232D cable with a male DB-25-S
connector at one end to attach to the modem.
• One of the following modular dial or leased
network interfaces:
— RJ11C for dial permissive applications
Before installing your standalone modem, make sure
your installation site is clean and well-ventilated. Allow
space around the modem for installing cables and
telephone line cords, and make sure the modem is located
within reach of the ac power outlet. The distance between
your modem and DTE should be minimized if DTE data
rates exceed 19,200 bps. Also, low capacitance cables
may be necessary for speeds greater than 19,200 bps or
distances greater than 50 feet.
The rear panel of a 3810Plus or 3820Plus modem has
the following switches and connectors (see Figures 2-2
and 2-3):
— JM8 for leased-line applications
• A JM8 to RJ11 crossover cable for 2-wire
leased-line applications (3820Plus only)
• An ON/Off power switch.
If you are installing a 3810Plus or 3820Plus modem,
continue reading the next section. If you are installing a
3811Plus modem, skip to 3811Plus Modem Installation,
later in this chapter.
2-2
3810Plus and 3820Plus
Modem Installation
• An 8-pin DIN type power receptacle for the
table-top power supply.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
3810Plus and 3820Plus Installation
• An 8-pin modular keyed jack for 4-wire/2-wire
leased lines (3810Plus only).
DTE Connection
• An 6-pin modular keyed jack for dial (PSTN) lines
(and, for 3820Plus only, 2-wire leased lines).
Use the following procedure to connect the RS-232D
cable from the modem to the DTE:
• A 4-pin modular jack for network management
system (NMS) connection.
1. Make sure the modem’s rear panel power switch is
Off.
• A 25-pin DB-25-S receptacle for DTE interface.
Connecting 3810Plus and 3820Plus Modems
with Supplied Cables
2. Connect the DB-25-P (male) connector on the
cable to the DB-25-S (female) connector labeled
DTE 1 (Figure 2-2 or Figure 2-3) on the modem’s
rear panel. Use a small screwdriver to tighten the
cable to the modem.
Figures 2-2 and 2-3 show how 3810Plus and 3820Plus
modems are connected to certain TELCO jack types using
the supplied cables. For other TELCO connections, refer
to Appendix D.
3. Connect the DB-25-P connector on the cable to
the DB-25-S connector on the DTE. Use a small
screwdriver to tighten the cable to the DTE.
DIAL
LEASED
LEASED
(3810Plus)
(3820Plus)
8-POSITION
PLUG FOR
LEASED-LINE
NETWORK
OPERATION
DTE 1
NMS
PWR
ON
OFF
DB-25-P
CONNECTOR
FOR DATA
TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT
OPERATION
6-POSITION PLUG
FOR PERMISSIVE
DIAL NETWORK
OPERATION
SUB-MINIATURE
4-POSITION
PLUG FOR
NETWORK
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OPERATION
POWER
SUPPLY
495-14677
Figure 2-2. 3810Plus Rear Panel
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
2-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
DIAL
LEASED
(3820Plus)
6-POSITION PLUG
FOR PERMISSIVE
DIAL NETWORK
OPERATION
OR 2-WIRE
LEASED LINE
NMS
DTE 1
PWR
ON
OFF
DB-25-P
CONNECTOR
FOR DATA
TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT
OPERATION
SUB-MINIATURE
4-POSITION
PLUG FOR
NETWORK
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OPERATION
POWER
SUPPLY
495-14680
Figure 2-3. 3820Plus Rear Panel
Dial-Line Connection
Use the following procedure to connect the 3810Plus
or 3820Plus modem to the dial network interface:
1. Insert the 6-position, 4-conductor modular plug
into the jack labeled DIAL/LEASED (Figure 2-3).
3810Plus 4-Wire/2-Wire
Leased-Line Network
Connection
Use the following procedure to connect a 3810Plus
modem to the leased-line network interface:
2. Insert the other end of the modular cord into the
dial network interface (“demarc”).
1. Insert the 8-position, 8-conductor modular plug
into the jack labeled LEASED (3810Plus)
(Figure 2-2).
2. Insert the other end of the modular cord into the
leased-line network interface (“demarc”).
3. If you intend to use dial backup, follow steps
listed in 3810Plus Dial-Line Connection section.
2-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
3810Plus and 3820Plus Installation
3820Plus 2-Wire Leased-Line
Network Connection
Network Management
System Connection
Obtain a JM8 to RJ11 (8-position to 6-position)
crossover modular cable. See the equipment list in
Appendix H for part number information, and Appendix E
for a wiring diagram.
For the 3810Plus or 3820Plus modem, use the
following procedure to connect the modem to the network
management system interface:
1. Insert the subminiature 4-position, 4-conductor
modular plug of the 3600 Hubbing Device
(Figure 2-4) into the jack labeled NMS
(Figure 2-2 or 2-3).
Use the following procedure to connect a
3820Plus modem to the leased-line network interface:
1. Insert the 6-position, 6-conductor modular plug
into the jack labeled DIAL/LEASED (3820Plus)
(Figure 2-3).
2. Insert the other end of the modular cord into the
leased-line network interface (“demarc”).
AC Power Supply Connection
2. Connect the 3600 Hubbing Device to the network
management system.
Refer to the 3600 Hubbing Device, Feature Number
3600-F3-300, Installation Instructions for more
information. Installation for the 3810Plus or 3820Plus
modem is the same as for the 3610 DSU.
Hubbing Device
WARNING
CC OUT/DC IN
Power supplies from other
modems may fit into the
POWER connector, but
connecting the wrong power
supply can cause damage to
the modem or the power
supply.
CC IN/DC OUT
E
VIC 0
DE -30
G 3
IN 0-F
BB 300
HU L #
0
0 E
30 OD
M
C
C
8-Pin
Modular
Jacks
C
/D
IN
T
U
O
C
C
C
D
T/
U
O
IN
8
1
8
1. Make sure the modem’s power switch is in the Off
position.
1
Use the following procedure to connect the modem to
an ac power outlet:
Pin
Numbers
4-Pin
Modular
Plug
6 Inches
Overall
496-13775-03
Figure 2-4. 3600 Hubbing Device
2. Insert the power transformer’s cylindrical
connector into the modem’s rear panel power
receptacle (Figure 2-2 or Figure 2-3).
3. Connect the power supply to a grounded ac power
outlet.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
2-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Modem Power-Up
Once your modem is properly connected to the DTE,
dial and/or leased lines, and ac outlet, press the modem’s
rear panel power switch to the ON position. The modem
begins a power-up self-test. This test takes several
seconds to perform, and verifies the operation of most
hardware components within the modem. If successful,
the LCD displays Power On Selftst Passed and continues
to the Top-Level menu screen.
Removing and Replacing
3810Plus and 3820Plus
Modems
To remove and replace a 3810Plus or 3820Plus
modem, perform the following steps:
Power On Selftst
Passed
F1
F2
1. Make sure the modem is offline, and toggle the
modem’s rear panel power switch to the Off
position.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the ac power
outlet, and then from the connector on the rear of
the modem.
F3
3. Disconnect the dial and leased-line modular cords
from the modem’s rear panel.
If a failure occurs during the self-test, the LCD may
display Power On Selftst Failed for several seconds. The
LCD then may display the Top-Level menu screen with
the message Power on Fail appearing on the top line of
the LCD. Although a failure has occurred, the modem
may attempt to operate. If it does, you can activate a more
thorough self-test using the Test branch. Refer to
Chapter 6, Test Branch.
If you are not installing a 3811Plus modem, continue
reading at Selecting Factory Configuration Options, later
in this chapter.
2-6
November 1996
4. Disconnect the DTE interface cable from the
modem’s rear panel.
If the modem is to be removed for service, return
it to the company using the procedures described
in Government Requirements and Equipment
Return near the beginning of this book.
5. Install the replacement modem as described in the
3810Plus and 3820Plus Modem Installation
section of this chapter, and configure it the same
way as the modem being replaced.
3980-A2-GB30-20
3811Plus Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3811Plus Modem Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer-Supplied Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3811Plus Modem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing 3811Plus Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-4
Overview
3811Plus Modem Package
The carrier-mounted 3811Plus modem (Figure 3-1) is
capable of dial or 4-wire/2-wire leased-line operation and
resides in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. The
faceplate of the 3811Plus has 16 LED status indicators for
displaying modem activity and an audio speaker jack for
the carrier’s optional speaker.
After opening the modem’s package, check for damage
and verify that the following items are present:
The 3811Plus modem’s backplate has two DTE edge
card connectors that mount into a connector plate located
on the rear of the carrier. This connector plate has two
DB-25-S connectors. One provides an RS-232D DTE
interface, and the other is unused. The 3811Plus derives
ac power from the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier’s
backplane, which is a common bus to all devices installed
in the carrier. The user interface with any 3811Plus is the
shared diagnostic control panel (SDCP), an optional
feature similar to the DCPs on the 3810Plus and
3820Plus. For a better understanding of DCP operation,
refer to Chapter 4, Front Panel Operation.
A copy of this User’s Guide is supplied with each
3000 Series Carrier.
The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has a total of
17 slots. The first slot, Slot 0, is reserved for the shared
diagnostic unit (SDU) while the remaining 16 slots can
house up to 16 3811Plus modems, or for mixed networks,
a combination of 3811Plus modems and other Paradyne
access products, such as Model 3611 data service units.
An SDU is a circuit card that provides SDCP and network
management interfaces to access products installed in the
carrier. SDUs are only required if a single SDCP is used
by multiple COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carriers in a
cabinet, or if a network management system (NMS) is
used.
• 3811Plus modem
• Rear connector plate with DB-25-P edge card
connector
If any hardware components are damaged, notify your
service representative. Return equipment using procedures
described in the Government Requirements and
Equipment Return section near the beginning of this book.
Customer-Supplied Equipment
The following customer-supplied equipment may be
required for the installation of a 3811Plus modem:
• A COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier.
• A Shared Diagnostic Unit (SDU, required for
network management applications and multiple
carriers).
• Two 50-pin mass termination cables, one Network
Interface Module (NIM) for modems installed in
Slots 1–8, and one NIM for modems installed in
Slots 9–16 (required for dial-line applications).
• One of the following dial or leased network
interfaces:
For more details on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series
Carrier, refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier,
Installation Manual.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
— 50-pin to modular cable (RJ11C) for dial
permissive applications
3-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
— 50-pin to modular cable (JM8) for leased line
applications
• One 6-position to 6-position modular cord (required
for network management applications).
• A Shared Diagnostic Control Panel (SDCP).
3811Plus Modem Installation
If the modem is to be managed by a network
management system, an SDU must be supplied and
properly connected to the network management controller.
For proper network management connection to the SDU,
refer to the appropriate network management system
user’s guide.
Faceplate
Pwr
Alrm
142
The 3811Plus modem is designed for installation in a
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier which supplies
operating power and the dial and/or leased-line network
connections. For correct power, DTE, dial-line,
leased-line, NIM, and network management cabling
information, refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series
Carrier, Installation Manual.
EIA232/V.24
Connector
EIA232/V.24
Edge Card
Connector
Test
Dial
125
Rear
Connector
Plate
EIA232/V.24
Status
For installation of the 3000 Series Carrier into a
cabinet, refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier,
Installation Manual.
RI
Busy
Serv
TXD
104
RXD
105
RTS
106
CTS
107
DSR
108
DTR
109
LSD
Front Panel
V.35 (3600/3500)
103
RS366A/V.25 (3800)
SQ
Unused
Spkr
3811Plus
496-14488-02
Figure 3-1. 3811Plus Modem
3-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
3811Plus Installation
The installation of a 3811Plus varies slightly if an
SDCP is installed on the front of the carrier. To install a
3811Plus modem into the carrier without an SDCP,
perform the following steps:
2. At the front of the carrier, hold the modem
vertically, with the latch on its faceplate in the
open position, and insert it into the top and bottom
card guides of one of the slots numbered 1–16 (see
Figure 3-2).
Slide the modem into the slot, aligning the modem
with the rear connector plate, until the backplane
connector and DTE connector seat firmly into the
back of the carrier. The faceplate latch
automatically closes as you push the modem into
the carrier. To lock the modem into the carrier,
press the faceplate latch until a click is heard.
CAUTION
If you remove the 3811Plus
from the carrier, always use a
ground strap when handling
the modem. Always store the
3811Plus in an antistatic bag
when it is removed from the
carrier.
1. At the rear of the carrier, install the rear connector
plate. Make sure the plate uses the same slot
position as that intended for the modem.
Loosely fasten the plate. This allows for slight
adjustments later when installing the modem.
3. If the carrier is connected to power, the Power
LED on the faceplate of the 3811Plus lights up.
After several seconds the modem completes its
power-up self-test in which all faceplate LEDs
light up. If the modem fails, or an alarm condition
exists, the Alrm LED on the faceplate lights up or
flashes.
Return to the rear of the carrier and tighten the
rear connector plate.
Figure 3-2. Installing a 3811Plus Modem
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
3-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
If the modem is to communicate with an installed
SDCP, install the modem as described above and perform
the following steps:
1. Press the Select key on the SDCP. The cursor
appears in the carrier selection entry.
Removing and Replacing
3811Plus Modems
It is not necessary to power down the carrier to remove
and replace a 3811Plus modem. Perform the following
steps:
2. Press the F1 (") or F2 (↓) key until the carrier
number you want appears on the LCD.
CAUTION
The carrier number selection has a range of 1 to 8
since a single SDCP can control a configuration of
up to eight carriers. (This is only possible if the
SDU is installed.)
3. Press the
key to position the cursor on the slot
selection entry.
If you remove the 3811Plus
modem from the carrier,
always use a ground strap
when handling the modem.
Always store the 3811Plus in
an antistatic bag when it is
removed from the carrier.
4. Press the F1 (") or F2 (↓) key until the slot
number (1–16) you want appears on the LCD.
Ignore the AB designator that appears on the LCD
since it is not applicable to the 3811Plus modem.
1. Rotate the circuit pack lock until the release tab is
exposed.
5. Press the Select key to place the SDCP in direct
communication with the selected modem.
2. Press down on the release tab and pull the modem
away from the carrier’s backplane.
The LCD displays the Top-Level menu for the
selected modem. In addition, the Front Panel LED
on the modem’s faceplate lights up.
6. Once you have determined that the modem is
installed properly and completed its power-up
self-test, rotate the circuit pack lock until it covers
the faceplate latch (Figure 3-2). This prevents the
modem from accidently being removed once it is
installed in a carrier.
7. Configure the modem as described in the
following chapter.
3-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Front Panel Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3810Plus and 3820Plus DCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3811Plus Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control Panel (SDCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top-Level Menu Status and Operational Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Factory Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-11
• Check modem status
Overview
• Set up configuration options
This chapter describes how to use the diagnostic
control panel (DCP) of the 3800Plus modem.
• Initiate diagnostic tests
• Access remote modems through the local modem’s
DCP
Diagnostic Control Panels
The LCD displays the result of any command initiated
using the DCP. Most of these operations can be performed
from an attached asynchronous DTE using the
AT command set.
There are two types of DCPs: the front panel on the
standalone 3810Plus and 3820Plus modems, and the
shared diagnostic control panel (SDCP), an optional
feature used with a 3811Plus modem installed in a
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. Both DCPs have a
two-line, 32-character liquid crystal display (LCD) and
keypad through which Top-Level menu branches are
accessed to perform the following:
3810Plus and 3820Plus DCP
The DCP of 3810Plus and 3820Plus modems
(Figure 4-1) contains status indicators, pushbutton-type
keys, and an LCD.
• Initiate and disconnect dial operations
F1
PWR
F3
F2
ALRM DIAG DTR
RTS
CTS
TXD
LSD
RXD
108
105
106
103
109
104
SQ
TEST RATE DIAL
COMSPHERE 3810Plus
142
496-14486-01
Figure 4-1. 3810Plus and 3820Plus DCP
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
4-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
3811Plus Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic
Control Panel (SDCP)
Status Indicators
The shared diagnostic control panel (SDCP) is used to
manage carrier-mounted 3811Plus modems. Use the
SDCP to issue commands to view and select configuration
options on, or to monitor tests for, a specific 3811Plus
modem.
The status indicators on a 3800Plus modem
continuously provide information on the modem’s
operating condition. All of the status indicators on the
3810Plus or 3820Plus modem are on the DCP
(Figure 4-1), whereas the status indicators for the
carrier-mounted 3811Plus modem are located on its
faceplate, the SDCP, and the SDU faceplate (Figure 4-2).
The faceplate of the 3811Plus contains LED status
indicators that monitor the operation of the modem. After
the SDCP is connected to the modem, the Front Panel
indicator of the selected modem lights to show that the
modem is connected.
The standalone 3810Plus or 3820Plus modem’s DCP
has 13 LEDs, and the carrier-mounted 3811Plus has 16
LEDs. These LEDs are listed and described in Table 4-1;
LEDs specific to one model type have the appropriate
model number shown in the table.
Figure 4-2 shows the SDCP and the shared diagnostic
unit (SDU) it interfaces with.
Status
Status
Pwr
OK
Alrm
Alrm
Diag
In
Diag
Out
142
Test
Dial
125
RI
Busy
Serv
SQ
103
TXD
104
RXD
105
RTS
106
CTS
107
DSR
108
DTR
109
LSD
Front Panel
Spkr
SDU
3811Plus
CARRIER SLOTS 1–16
SDU
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Select
OK
SELECT
KEY
Alarm BckUp Test
F1
EC
STATUS
INDICATORS
OK
NETWORK
DEVICE
ALARM
Alarm BckUp Test
F2
F3
KEYPAD
COMSPHERE 3000
LCD
496-14487-01
EC
ERROR
CORRECTION
DIAL
BACKUP
TEST
MODE
Figure 4-2. Optional SDCP, 3811Plus Faceplate, and Optional SDU
4-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Front Panel Operation
Table 4-1
3800Plus DCP LEDs
Label
Color
Indicates
Pwr
green
ON – Power is on and the modem is capable of operating.
Alrm
red
Flashing – A malfunction has been detected in either the modem or COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier.
Diag
(3810Plus and
3820Plus only)
green
The modem has responded to a diagnostic command from network management.
Test/142
yellow
The modem is involved in a test. Normal operation is not possible.
Dial
green
Quick Flashing – The modem is attempting to establish a call over the dial network.
Slow Flashing – The modem is in Dial Standby mode.
ON – The modem has established a dial connection.
OFF – A dial connection does not exist.
RI/125
(3811Plus only)
green
A ringing signal is being received.
Busy
(3811Plus only)
yellow
ON – The modem is placed in a forced busy condition and is off-hook.
Serv
(3811Plus only)
yellow
ON – The modem is connected to the carrier service line rather than the normally assigned
dial network.
SQ
yellow
The receive telephone line signal is degraded.
TXD/103
green
The modem is receiving data from the DTE to transmit. (ON equals space.)
RXD/104
green
Data is being transferred to the DTE. (ON equals space.)
RTS/105
green
RTS signal is ON.
CTS/106
green
CTS signal is ON, or the modem is configured to force ON CTS, or AT commands are
enabled.
DSR/107
(3811Plus only)
green
DSR signal is ON, or the modem is configured to force ON DSR.
DTR/108
green
The DTE has turned ON DTR, or the modem is configured to ignore DTR.
LSD/109
green
The modem has detected a valid carrier signal and is capable of transferring data to the DTE,
or the modem is configured to force ON LSD.
Front Panel
(3811Plus only)
yellow
ON – The modem is connected to the carrier’s SDCP.
Rate
(3810Plus and
3820Plus only)
yellow
ON – The modem is connected at a data rate lower than the line rate it is configured for.
3980-A2-GB30-20
OFF – The modem is connected at its configured line rate.
November 1996
4-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
The SDCP LEDs are listed and described in Table 4-2.
MOVES UP
ONE LEVEL
FROM CURRENT
DISPLAY
Table 4-2
SDCP LEDs
Label
OK
Alarm
BckUp
Test
EC
Color
green
red
yellow
yellow
green
HIDDEN
CHOICE
INDICATORS
LCD
TOP
LINE
RETURNS
DISPLAY TO
TOP-LEVEL
MENU
Idle:28.8
Call_Setup
Indicates
Power is ON and the
modem is capable of
operating.
F1
The modem has detected
a problem with its
operation. For example,
the modem failed a
self-test.
LEFT
SCROLL
KEY
Modem is in Error Control
mode.
F3
FUNCTION KEYS
LCD BOTTOM LINE
The modem, originally
configured for leased-line
operation, is now
operating on dial networks
in a Dial Backup mode.
The modem is involved in
a test. Normal operation is
not possible.
F2
RIGHT
SCROLL
KEY
Figure 4-3. 3800Plus LCD and Keypad
LCD Display
The LCD consists of a top line and bottom line, with
each displaying a maximum of 16 characters at a time. If
additional information appears on the LCD than what is
currently displayed, a hidden choice indicator (< or
or >) appears in the upper right-hand corner of the LCD.
Use the
or
key to scroll in the indicated direction
to display more selections onto the LCD.
DCP Operation
The 3800Plus modem’s diagnostic control panel (DCP)
is the user interface to all functions used to configure and
control the modem. This interface includes the status
light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and a two-line, 32-character
liquid crystal display (LCD) and keypad (Figure 4-3).
Use the DCP to display the following kinds of
information:
• Operational status
• Configuration options
• DCP entry displays
Hidden Choice Indicators
The Hidden Choice Indicators serve as an alert that
other selections are available besides what is currently
displayed on the LCD. These indicators appear as one of
the following symbols:
Right Scroll Indicator >
The right scroll indicator displays when more choices
are available to the right of what is currently displayed on
the LCD.
• Remote modem access
4-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Front Panel Operation
Left/Right Scroll Indicator
Key
The left/right scroll indicator displays when more
choices are available to the left and right of what is
currently displayed on the LCD.
The
and
Left Scroll Indicator <
The left scroll indicator displays when more choices
are available to the left of what is currently displayed on
the LCD. The LCD does not wrap around to the first
choice once you have reached the end of choices.
key moves you up one level in the menu tree.
Keys
Use the
and
keys to move the viewing
window left or right and to scroll the remaining branches
and selections into view. A maximum of three selections
can be displayed at one time.
These keys also allow you to move the cursor one
character to the left or right on data entry displays; for
example, to allow entry of one digit at a time.
Remote Mode Indicator
If the local 3800Plus modem establishes a connection
with the remote 3800Plus modem via the Remote branch,
then appears in place of the hidden choice indicator on
both modems.
F1, F2, F3 Keys
Function keys select the LCD choice that appears
above the function key; they are labeled F1, F2, and F3. If
a selection spans more than one function key, then any of
those keys choose that selection.
Keypad
The DCP on the 3810Plus or 3820Plus has seven keys
while the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000
Series Carrier has eight keys. The additional key on the
carrier is the Select key, used to connect the SDCP to a
specific slot in the carrier.
Key
The
key returns you to the Top-Level menu
display from anywhere in the menu tree.
Pressing
while changing configuration options
displays the message Save Straps? Yes No. If No is
selected, changes made to configuration options are not
saved and the Top-Level menu appears. If Yes is selected,
then changes are saved to either Active (Saved),
Customer 1, or Customer 2 configuration areas.
3980-A2-GB30-20
Up and Down Scroll Indicators " #
To enter a number on the DCP, such as a telephone
number to be stored in the modem’s directory, the
function keys F2 (") or F3 (#) are used. A displayed
number is increased or decreased according to whether the
key associated with the up arrow or the down arrow is
pressed. In other applications, such as password entry,
only the up arrow is displayed, and the displayed numbers
can only be incremented.
Select
Key (3811Plus only)
The Select key appears on the optional SDCP of the
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. It is used to connect
the SDCP to a modem in a specific slot in the carrier.
November 1996
4-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Menu Structure
Configure
The menu tree is a hierarchical structure used to
display functions that configure and control local and
remote 3800Plus modems. It is accessed via the DCP and
is shown in Appendix A.
 Used to change and save the
modem’s configuration
options. (See Chapter 8.)
Control
 Used to control the modem’s
hardware and software
functions. (See Chapter 9.)
Remote
 Used to access and control a
remote 3800Plus modem. (See
Chapter 10.)
Security
 Used to control the modem’s
dial access security. Appears
only if the optional security
feature is installed. (See
Chapter 11.)
The menu tree contains the following branches:
Call Setup
 Used to dial, disconnect, and
answer telephone calls as well
as store up to 10 telephone
numbers in directory locations.
(See Chapter 5.)
Status
 Used to monitor the current
status of the VF line and DTE
interface as well as view the
identity of the modem. (See
Chapter 6.)
Test
4-6
 Used to begin and end various
modem tests. (See Chapter 7.)
Menu tree branches are described in Chapters 5
through 11. Functions that appear on the LCD vary
depending upon the type of model installed, its operating
mode, and software configuration.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Front Panel Operation
Top-Level Menu Status and
Operational Messages
Messages listed in Table 4-5 are dial access security
messages that can occur when the optional security
feature is installed.
Access to all menu tree branches from the DCP begins
at the Top-Level menu, the head of the menu hierarchy.
The LCD’s top line identifies the modem status, as listed
in Table 4-3, while the bottom line displays the main
menu tree branches and operational and dial access
security messages, as listed in Table 4-4 and Table 4-5.
The Top-Level menu’s main branches appear on the
LCD in the order of Call Setup, Status, Test, Configure,
Control, Security, and Remote. These branches are
described in the following chapters.
Messages listed in Table 4-4 are common operational
messages that occur during modem operation. These
messages normally appear on the second line of the LCD.
Table 4-3
(1 of 3)
Top Level Menu Status
Normal Operation
Status Message
Indicates
Idle:MR*
The modem is configured for dial network operation and is on-hook.
Leased:MR*
The modem is operating on leased lines at the displayed data rate.
OnLine:MR* EC**
Indicates the modem is online, in Data mode, and operating at the displayed data rate. EC (error
control) displays if error control is operational.
Fax Tx:MR*
The modem is transmitting a fax on a dial line.
Fax Rx:MR*
The modem is receiving a fax on a dial line.
Ring Indicate
The local modem is receiving an incoming ring.
Test:MR*
The modem is in test mode operating at the displayed data rate.
Alarm Status
Message***
Indicates
Make Busy
Indicates the modem is in a Make Busy condition.
Power On Fail
Indicates the modem has failed its Power-On Self-test.
Self Health Fail
Indicates a failure in the modem’s hardware components.
*MR – Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using. One of the following values appears: 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 7200, 9600, 12K (12,000), 14.4K (14,400), 16.8K (16,800), 19.2K (19,200), 21,600, 24,000, 26,400, 28,800,
31,200, or 33,600 bps.
**EC – Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V.42 or MNP error control. One of the following values
appears after the modem rates listed above: MNP2, MNP3, MNP4, MNP5, V42, V42b, or NoEC. (NoEC indicates the
modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control. If an EC value does not appear, then the modem is in
Direct mode.)
*** The Alarm Status Messages only appear when the Normal Operation Status Messages display; the LCD alternates
between the two message sets.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
4-7
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 4-3
(2 of 3)
Top Level Menu Status
Normal Call
Setup Messages
Indicates
Off Hook
The modem is off-hook and waiting to dial a telephone number.
Dialing
The remote modem is being dialed.
Training
The modem is training or retraining.
EC Negotiating
The local and remote modems are negotiating the highest possible level of error control
compatible between both modems. Once a level is selected, this LCD message disappears.
Call Failure
Messages
Indicates
Busy Signal
The answering modem is busy.
Dial Line in Use
The modem is already operating on dial networks when another call attempt has been issued.
Invalid Number
The modem has dialed a telephone number not stored in a directory location.
No Answer Tone
The answering modem has not answered within the time limit specified by the No Answer
Timeout configuration option.
No Dial – DTR
The modem cannot dial because DTR is Off.
No Dial – Test
The modem cannot dial because it is running a Test.
No Dial Tone
The modem has aborted the call because it cannot detect a dial tone.
No Quiet Answer
The modem has detected No Quiet Answer (@) before the time-out setting of the No Answer
Disconnect configuration option.
Trunk Busy
The modem is receiving a fast (trunk) busy.
Call Disconnect
Messages
Indicates
ATH Disconnect
The modem has disconnected due to an ATH command.
Bad Lines Disc
The modem has disconnected because the lines do not support the modulation and/or data rate
selected.
No Carrier Disc
The modem disconnects due to the loss of carrier signal from the remote modem.
DTR Disconnect
The modem has disconnected due to the loss of DTR from the DTE.
EC Disconnect
The modem has disconnected due to failure to negotiate Error Control mode.
LongSpace Disc
The modem has disconnected due to the detection of a long space.
NoData Disc
The modem has disconnected due to a lack of transmitted and received data.
Disconnecting
The modem has begun the disconnect sequence.
Rmt Cmnded Disc
The modem has disconnected due to a V.32 or V.34 Cleardown received from the remote
modem.
4-8
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Front Panel Operation
Table 4-3
(3 of 3)
Top Level Menu Status
Dial Backup
Messages
Indicates
Dial Standby
The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode.
DialBckUp:MR*
The modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode at the displayed data rate and is configured for
Direct mode.
Backup:MR* EC**
The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode and is configured for error control and data
compression on leased lines.
Stndby:MR* EC**
The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode and is configured for error control and data
compression on leased lines.
Firmware Download
Result Messages
Indicates
DownldOnly Mode
Indicates that a local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware has failed. The
modem is currently in a Download Only mode in which only another download attempt is
possible.
Frmware Upgrade
Indicates that a local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware was successful.
RemClone Failed
Displays on the local modem’s LCD and indicates that a remote cloning of firmware has failed.
Remote Clone OK
Displays on the local modem’s LCD and indicates that a remote cloning of firmware was
successful.
AT Command
Reset Message
Reset by AT command
Indicates
The modem has performed a reset in response to an ATZ command.
* MR. Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using. One of the following values appears: 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 7200, 9600, 12K (12,000), 14.4K (14,400), 16.8K (16,800), 19.2K (19,200), 21,600, 24,000, 26,400, 28,800,
31,200, or 33,600 bps.
** EC. Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V.42 or MNP error control. One of the following values
appears after the modem rates listed above: MNP2, MNP3, MNP4, MNP5, V42, V42b, or NoEC. (NoEC indicates the
modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control. If an EC value does not appear, then the modem is in
Direct mode.)
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
4-9
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 4-4
Common Operational Messages
Common
Operational
Messages
Indicates
Please Wait...
Appears when a command to a local device takes more than two seconds to complete.
Command Sent...
Appears when a command is sent to a remote modem.
No Rem Response or
Remote Modem Fail
Appears when a remote modem does not respond to a command within 5 seconds.
Command Complete
Appears when a command, issued to a local or remote modem, is completed.
Invalid Command
Appears when the modem cannot complete a command.
Table 4-5
Dial Access Security Messages
Dial Access
Security
Messages
Indicates
Get VF PsWd
The answering modem is waiting for the originating caller to transmit a VF password.
Get DTE PsWd
The answering modem is waiting to receive a valid DTE password from the remote DTE.
VF PsWd Timeout
The modem did not finish answering a call (disconnected) because the allowed time limit was
exceeded before the modem received a VF password from the originating dialer.
Unknown DTEpswd
The modem did not finish answering a call (disconnected) because the DTE passwords received
from the remote DTE were invalid.
No Orig PsWd
The modem did not attempt to establish a call as requested because the AT dial command did not
contain an originate access password.
Unknown VF PsWd
The modem did not finish answering a call (disconnected) because the modem received an
invalid VF password.
DTEpswd Timeout
The modem did not finish answering a call (disconnected) because the allowed time limit was
exceeded before the modem received a DTE password from the remote DTE.
Inval Orig PsWd
The modem did not attempt to establish the call as requested because the originate password in
the AT dial command was not valid.
DTR Dial Blocked
Appears if DTR dialing is used and Answer Access or Originate Access security is enabled. DTR
dialing is not permitted when security is enabled.
SecurityBlocked
Appears only when the modem is in base mode (a mode that occurs during a firmware download)
and Answer Access Security is enabled. In this case, the access verification capabilities are not
available and the modem does not pass data to the DTE under any circumstances.
4-10
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Front Panel Operation
Selecting Factory
Configuration Options
key until the appropriate factory
4. Press the
preset appears on the LCD, and press the
corresponding function key to select your choice.
After the modem passes the power-up self-test,
configure it for operation using one of the factory preset
configurations.
5. Choose Function appears and displays the Edit
and Save functions.
The 3800Plus modems have several factory preset
templates that contain the most commonly used
configuration options (straps) for Asynchronous Dial,
Synchronous Dial, Synchronous Leased (Answer or
Originate), UNIX hardware network, cellular mobile, and
cellular PSTN configurations. Your modem is shipped
from the factory with the Async Dial default configuration
options stored in memory. If Sync Dial, Sync Leased,
UNIX Dial, or Cellular is more appropriate for your
configuration, then you must change the factory setting
using either the modem’s DCP or the AT command set as
described in the following sections.
6. Press the F3 key (Save) to save the new factory
preset configuration to one of three configuration
areas, Active (Saved), Customer 1, or
Customer 2.
(These three configuration areas are nonvolatile
memory locations. Active (Saved) contains the
most recently saved changes to any configuration
options. In the event of power loss, the modem
retrieves these configuration options. Customer 1
and Customer 2 are user-defined configuration
areas.)
The LCD now displays Sav EditArea to.
The preset configuration gives you a “head start” in
getting your modem operating and reduces the amount of
time required to configure your modem. For a better
understanding of DCP operation and factory preset
configuration options, refer to Chapter 8, Configure
Branch.
key until the appropriate
7. Press the
configuration area appears on the LCD, then press
the corresponding function key to select your
choice. (Saving configuration options to the
Active (Saved) configuration area automatically
saves them to the Active (Operating)
configuration area.) The LCD displays Command
Complete.
Using the Diagnostic Control Panel (DCP)
The DCP’s liquid crystal display (LCD) consists of two
16-character lines which display modem status, control
functions, and configuration options as well as indicating
your location in the Top-Level menu tree (Appendix A).
To change the factory template using the DCP, perform
the following steps:
1. On the DCP press the
comes into view.
8. The modem is now configured with the selected
key to return to the
factory template. Press the
Top-Level menu.
Refer to Chapter 8, Configure Branch, for more
information regarding default factory configuration
options.
key until Configure
Using AT Commands
2. Press the function key below Configure to select
the Configure branch.
The LCD now displays Ld EditArea frm.
3. Press the
key until Factory comes into view,
then press the F1 key to display the factory preset
configurations.
Factory preset configurations are Async Dial,
Sync Dial, Sync Leased, UNIX Dial, Cellular
(Mobile), and Cellular (PSTN). If Sync Leased is
selected, you must choose either Answer or
Originate mode.
3980-A2-GB30-20
When using AT commands, the following criteria must
be met:
• Make sure the asynchronous DTE’s communication
software is configured for 10-bit character format
(for example, 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit).
• Make sure the DTE (RS-232D) cable is attached to
the DTE connector on the rear of the 3810Plus or
3820Plus modem, or (for the 3811Plus modem) the
rear of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, and
the correct serial communications port on the
asynchronous DTE.
November 1996
4-11
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
• On initial power-up, the modem is in Command
mode. To verify that the modem is connected and
functioning properly, enter the following:
TYPE:
(NOTE: &F1, &F2, and &F4 remove AT
command control. The only way to return to AT
command control is through the DCP as described
earlier in Using the Diagnostic Control Panel
(DCP).)
AT
PRESS: Return (Enter)
and
The screen displays OK.
Where:
If the modem does not return OK, refer to Appendix B,
Troubleshooting.
(NOTE: These three configuration areas are
nonvolatile memory locations. Active (Saved)
contains the most recently saved changes to any
configuration options. In the event of power loss,
the modem retrieves these configuration options.
Customer 1 and Customer 2 are user-defined
configuration areas.)
NOTE
If you have already changed the
factory preset configuration you
may have lost AT command
control. To regain AT command
control, select, via the DCP, the
Async Dial factory preset
configuration as described
earlier in Using the Diagnostic
Control Panel (DCP).
PRESS: Return (Enter)
2. The selected factory configuration is saved.
To change a factory template using AT commands,
perform the following steps (for more information on
changing factory templates using AT commands, refer to
Chapter 13, AT Command Set and S-Registers).
1. Use the AT&F&W command to load the
appropriate factory configuration to the
appropriate storage area. Enter the following:
4-12
TYPE:
AT&Fy&Wn
Where:
y is one of the following Factory
configurations:
0 for Async Dial
1 for Sync Dial
2 for Sync Leased (Answer)
3 for UNIX Dial
4 for Sync Leased (Originate)
5 for Cellular (Mobile)
6 for Cellular (PSTN)
n is one of the following storage areas:
0 for Active (Saved)
1 for Customer 1
2 for Customer 2
The &V (View) command can be used to display the
configuration options in effect. The output of the &V
command can be saved to a file and printed (using your
communications software), providing both a record of
your configuration and a worksheet for configuration
enhancements. Refer to Chapter 13, AT Commands and
S-Registers, for more on AT commands.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Front Panel Operation
Diagnostic Control Panel Security Access
To access the Front Panel (DCP) Security Access
function, perform the following:
NOTE
This page of the manual is
self-supporting and can be
removed to prevent unwanted
knowledge of the DCP security
access selections.
key three times.
Press the
key twice.
Press the
key once.
Frnt Panl Acces
Grant
Deny
Use the DCP security access function to ‘‘lock” the
DCP of any 3800Plus modem and prevent unwanted user
access. Two options are available for this function: Grant
and Deny.
Grant allows any branch of the Top-Level menu to be
accessed from the DCP. Deny allows access only to the
Status branch of the Top-Level menu. All 3800Plus
modems are shipped from the factory with DCP access
granted.
3980-A2-GB30-20
Press the
F1
F2
F3
Select Grant to allow access or select Deny to lock
DCP access.
Either selection results in a return to the Top-Level
menu.
November 1996
4-13
Call Setup Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Setup Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Standby/Return to Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Telephone Numbers and Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
NOTE
The Call Setup branch of the Top-Level menu allows
you to dial, disconnect, and answer telephone calls. It also
allows you to create and store up to 10 telephone numbers
to directory locations. Six different functions can appear
under Call Setup: Dial, Disconnect, Answer, Dial Standby
or Return to Dial (when applicable), and Change
Directory.
3980-A2-GB30-20
5
November 1996
The Dial Standby and Return to
Dial functions only appear when
the modem is in Dial Backup
mode.
5-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Call Setup Branch
Dial Directory: 01
Dialing
In the following descriptions, the shaded key indicates
what key to press to perform the described operation.
F1
F2
F3
To access the Call Setup branch from the Top-Level
menu, select Call Setup:
Idle: 28.8
Call_Setup
F1
F2
Once the directory location you want appears on the
LCD, press the F2 or F3 key to dial the number.
>
If the connection is successful, the modem is online
and one of the Normal Operation status messages appears
on the LCD. If the connection is not successful, the LCD
displays one of the Call Failure status messages. (See
Table 3-3 in Chapter 3.)
F3
Dial
If DTE dialing is enabled and any character is received
from the DTE before the modem goes online, the dial
sequence is aborted. This is known as any-key abort.
Dial allows you to dial any telephone number stored in
directory locations 1–10. Any telephone number dialed
using the DCP must already exist in a directory location.
Refer to Change Directory for information on storing
telephone numbers in directory locations.
AT Command Equivalent
The AT command equivalent for Dial is DS=n, where n
is directory location 1–10.
To access Dial from the Call Setup branch, make the
following selection:
Disconnect
Call Setup:
Dial Disconnect
F1
F2
>
F3
Disconnect allows the modem to go on-hook (hang
up). Use this function when you want to disconnect an
established call on a dial line.
To access Disconnect from the Call Setup branch,
make the following selection:
Select Dial to display the first directory telephone
number.
Call Setup:
Dial Disconnect
Dial Directory:
Nxt 01:5551234
F1
F2
F1
F3
F2
>
F3
Select Disconnect.
To view other directory locations, select Nxt.
5-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Call Setup Branch
Disconnect
Command Complete
F1
F2
Answer
Command Complete
F3
F1
The modem goes on-hook (hangs up) and the call is
disconnected. This includes any calls being used for dial
backup of leased lines. The Command Complete status
message is displayed.
To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup
branch, press the
key. To exit and return to the
Top-Level menu, press the
key.
F3
F2
The modem goes off-hook and attempts to establish a
connection in Answer mode. The Command Complete
status message appears on the LCD.
To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup
branch, press the
key. To exit and return to the
key.
Top-Level menu, press the
AT Command Equivalent
AT Command Equivalent
The AT command equivalent for Answer is A.
The AT command equivalent for Disconnect is H or
H0.
Dial Standby/Return to Dial
Answer
Answer allows the modem to go off-hook, generate an
answer tone, and begin the handshaking process with the
calling modem. Use the Answer function when the
Auto-Answer Ring Count configuration option is
disabled. (See the Line Dialer section in Chapter 7,
Configure Branch.)
To access Answer from the Call Setup branch, make
the following selections:
The Dial Standby and Return to Dial functions appear
on the LCD only after the modem, operating on leased
lines, is placed into dial backup. Once the modem is
operating in Dial Backup mode, these functions allow the
modem to be switched back and forth between dial and
leased-line operation while still maintaining the dial
connection. See Figure 5-1. (Switching between dial and
leased-line operation can be performed manually or
automatically by enabling the Auto Dial Standby
configuration option.)
Call Setup:
Answer
F1
Press the
Answer.
F2
F3
key until Answer is displayed. Select
DIAL BACKUP LINE
RETURN
TO DIAL
DIAL
STANDBY
X
MODEM
X
LEASED-LINE
FAILURE
MODEM
496-13081-01
Figure 5-1. Dial Backup
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
5-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
For example, under normal dial backup conditions,
when a problem occurs on the leased line, the modems
establish a connection over the dial network using a
telephone number stored in directory location 1.
Dial Standby
Command Complete
F1
Call Setup:
Dial Standby
F1
F2
F2
F3
If the modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode, the
Dial Standby function forces the modem to leased lines
and displays the status message Command Complete.
F3
When this occurs, the Dial Standby function now
appears on the LCD. By selecting this function, the
modem switches back to the leased line while still
maintaining the dial connection. As a result, the Return to
Dial function now appears on the LCD instead of Dial
Standby.
Once the modem is in Dial Standby mode, the Return
to Dial function appears on the LCD. Selecting this
function forces the modem to dial networks and displays
the status message Command Complete.
AT Command Equivalent
There is no AT Command equivalent for Dial Standby
or Return to Dial.
Call Setup:
Return_to_Dial
Change Directory
F1
F2
F3
If the leased line is found to be unacceptable, select
Return to Dial which switches the modem back to dial
network operation (LCD displays Dial Standby). If,
however, the leased line is operating properly, you can
select Disconnect from the Call Setup branch and drop the
dial-line call.
Change Directory allows you to enter or modify
telephone numbers. The modem has nonvolatile memory
locations that allow you to store up to 10 telephone
numbers. Each directory location can accept up to
40 characters; this includes the telephone number and dial
command modifiers. Any telephone number dialed using
the DCP Dial command must appear in a directory
location.
To access Dial Standby or Return to Dial from the Call
Setup branch, make the following selections:
If the modem is operating on
leased lines and has a dial line
attached for dial backup
purposes, it is required that
directory location 1 contain the
telephone number used for dial
backup.
Call Setup:
Dial Standby
F1
F2
NOTE
F3
Press the
key until Dial Standby or Return to Dial
is displayed. Select the appropriate function.
5-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Call Setup Branch
To access Change Directory from the Call Setup
branch, make the following selections:
Call Setup:
Change_Directory
F1
F2
Select Nxt until a blank directory appears on the LCD.
(The cursor ( { ) always appears in the first character
position.)
Select F2 (") or F3 (#) until the desired character is
selected. This can be an alpha or numeric character.
>
F3
02 : 9 z
NxtąąąĄ"
Press the
key until Change Directory is displayed.
Press any function key to select Change Directory.
01 : 5551234 ←
Nxt
"
F1
F2
F1
F2
#
F3
Press the
key to move the cursor to the next
character position.
#
Continue this key sequence until the dial command
modifiers and telephone number are entered. (Refer to
Table 5-1 for an explanation of the dial command
modifiers available from the DCP.)
F3
The phone number listed in directory location 1 is
displayed. Select Nxt to display other directory locations.
01 : 9W5556789 z
NxtąąąĄ"
#
Entering Telephone Numbers
and Dial Command Modifiers
into Directory Locations
F1
F2
F3
The following example uses an empty directory
location for describing how to enter a telephone number.
If you want to change an existing telephone number in
any of the ten directory locations, follow the same
procedures.
To save the number just entered, scroll to the next
directory location by selecting Nxt. The number is now
stored in nonvolatile memory.
To add a telephone number to a directory location,
make the following selections:
AT Command Equivalent
02 : z
NxtąąąĄ"
F1
3980-A2-GB30-20
F2
#
The AT command for Change Directory is & Zn=x,
where n is the directory location and x is the telephone
number.
Table 5-1 describes what can be entered in directory
locations.
F3
November 1996
5-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 5-1
Valid Dial Command Modifier
Dial Command modifiers are parameters entered in the dial command string which specify how, when, and what number
to dial. The following is a list of parameters the 3800Plus modems recognize:
T – Tone (DTMF) dial. Any digit 0–9, *, #, A, B, C, or D can be dialed as tone.
P – Pulse dial. Only the digits 0–9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode.
,–
Pause. Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the dial string. The length of this
pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option (see Line Dialer configuration option
group) or by value held in S-Register S8.
W or + – Wait for dial tone. Modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string. This can be the initial
dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX. For example, 9W 555-6789.
R – Reverse Dial mode. Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects ringback.
(Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call.) The R parameter must be the last
character in the dial string.
@ – Quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number. If the silence is not detected, the modem
sends the NO ANSWER result code to the DTE or displays the No Quiet Answer LCD status message.
!–
Hook flash. This causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5 seconds then return to off-hook.
;–
Return to Command mode. Modem returns to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the
call. This permits you to enter long international telephone numbers, or additional information such as a calling card
number, that would exceed the 40-character limit.
Space, –, and ( ). These characters are ignored by the dial string and can be included to enhance readability.
z – End of Number. Hides all characters appearing on the LCD entered to the right of this indicator.
5-6
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Status Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-4
Overview
Status Branch
The Status branch of the Top-Level menu allows you
to view the current status of the dial or leased-line
connection, the DTE interface, and the identity (for
example, serial number and model number) of your
equipment. There are up to five selections under Status:
VF, Identity, DTE, Options, and Record.
To access Status from the Top-Level menu, make the
following selections:
Idle : 28.8
Status
F1
Press the
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Test
F2
F3
key until Status appears. Select Status.
6-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
VF
SigQual
Signal Quality indicates the
condition of the VF line.
Possible values are Excelent
(Excellent), Good, Fair, Poor,
or No Signal.
RevLev
Receive Signal Level indicates,
in decibels referenced to one
milliwatt (dBm), the actual
strength of the incoming signal.
Sig/Noise
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
indicates, in decibels, the
receive signal strength relative
to noise on the line.
NearEcho
Near End Echo displays the
signal level, in decibels
referenced to one milliwatt
(dBm), of that portion of the
transmit signal which has been
echoed back by the local line
termination.
FarEcho
Far End Echo displays the
signal level, in decibels
referenced to one milliwatt
(dBm), of that portion of the
transmit signal which has been
echoed back by the remote line
termination.
FarEchDel
Far End Echo Delay indicates
the roundtrip delay in
milliseconds of the far end
echo.
EchoFreqOff
Echo Frequency Offset
indicates the frequency offset
of the far end echo.
VF displays the condition of the dial or leased-line
connection.
To access VF from the Status branch, make the
following selection:
Status:
VF
F1
Identity
F2
F3
Select VF.
Status : VF
>
SigQual = Excelent
F1
F2
F3
The modem’s signal quality is displayed on the LCD’s
bottom line. Press the
key to scroll and view the
receive signal level, signal-to-noise ratio, near end echo,
far end echo delay, and echo frequency offset.
NOTE
SigQual, NearEcho, FarEcho,
FarEchDel, and EchoFreqOff
values appear only for V.34,
V.32terbo, V.32bis, and
V.32 modulations.
To exit VF and remain in the Status Branch, press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level menu, press
key.
the
AT Command Equivalent
There is no AT command equivalent for VF status.
6-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Status Branch
Identity
Identity displays the modem’s serial number, model
number, firmware revision level, hardware part number
and firmware part number. Retrieval of this information is
useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement
modems and/or making firmware upgrades.
To exit this function and remain in the Status branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
AT Command Equivalent
The AT command I0 displays the product code,
normally 144.
To access Identity from the Status branch, make the
following selection:
The AT command I1 displays an abbreviated firmware
revision number.
Status:
VF
F1
The AT command I2 performs an EPROM check and
displays OK or Error.
Identity
F2
The AT command I3 displays the modem’s serial
number.
F3
The AT command I4 displays the modem’s model
number.
Select Identity.
Status : Identity
Ser # = 00000000
F1
F2
The AT command I5 displays the part number of the
circuit card.
>
The AT command I6 displays the firmware release
number.
F3
The AT command I9 displays the firmware revision
number (same as I1).
The modem’s serial number is displayed on the LCD’s
bottom line. Press the
key to scroll and view the
model number, firmware revision level, hardware part
number, and firmware part number.
Ser #
Serial number is an 8-digit number that
identifies the modem.
Mod #
Model number is an alphanumeric
number that identifies the modem as
either a 3810Plus modem (if the model
number begins with 3980), a 3811Plus
modem (if the model number begins
with 3981), or a 3820Plus modem (if
the model number begins with 3982).
FRev
Firmware revision level is an
alphanumeric number that identifies the
level of firmware loaded in the modem.
HPt #
Hardware part number is an 11-digit
number that identifies the circuit card in
the modem.
FPt #
Firmware part number is an 11-digit
number that identifies to service
personnel the firmware release number.
3980-A2-GB30-20
The AT command I10 alters the value of the product
code displayed with the I0 command. See Chapter 13 for
more information about the I0 command.
The AT command I11 performs a checksum of the
modem’s firmware and displays the results in
hexadecimal. (There is no DCP equivalent of this
command.)
The AT command I19 displays the firmware revision
level.
November 1996
6-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
DTE
Options
DTE displays the state and/or activity of the
EIA-232-D interface leads: LSD, DTR, DSR, Tst, TXD,
RXD, RTS, and CTS signals are monitored. The interface
leads status is updated every 5 seconds.
The Options Status function displays all optional
firmware features currently installed in the modem (for
example, V.29, V.33, and dial network management). If no
firmware options are installed, None_Installed appears on
the LCD.
To access DTE from the Status branch, make the
following selections:
Status:
Identity
F1
To access Options from the Status branch, make the
following sections:
DTE
F2
Status:
DTE
Options
F3
F1
F2
F3
Press the key until DTE appears. Select DTE.
Press the
Options.
key until Options appears. Select
LSD DTR DSR Tst >
_
*
_
F1
F2
Options’ Status
V.29
F3
F1
The activity and state of the modem’s DTE signal
key to
appear on the LCD’s bottom line. Press the
scroll other signals into view.
The LCD’s bottom line displays a pair of symbols for
each interface lead. The first symbol indicates the signal’s
activity during the sampling interval. (An * (asterisk)
indicates at least one transition while a blank space
indicates no transitions since the last update.)
The second symbol indicates the state of the interface
lead at the sampling time. (A block) indicates a Space or
ON condition while an underscore (_) indicates a Mark or
Off condition.)
To exit this function and remain in the Status branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
AT Command Equivalent
There is no AT command for DTE status.
F2
>
V.33
F3
If optional features are installed in the modem, they
appear on the LCD’s bottom line. If other features are
installed, press the
key to scroll other features into
view. If no optional features are installed, None_Installed
is displayed.
Record
Record is a troubleshooting tool used by the end user in
conjunction with support personnel. This function allows
the end user to retrieve and report any sequence faults to
support personnel. A sequence fault is an irregular or
unexpected event.
There are two selections under Record: Display and
Clear. Display allows up to eight sequence fault messages
that have been recorded by the modem to be displayed on
the LCD. If no sequence faults have occurred, then
Modem O.K. appears.
Clear is used to remove all sequence fault messages
from nonvolatile memory and the LCD.
6-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Status Branch
To access Record from the Status branch, make the
following selections:
Status
Options
F1
Press the
Record Number 1
Modem O.K.
F1
<
F3
Record
F2
F3
key until Record appears. Select Record.
F2
The LCD displays the first sequence fault field.
(Sequence fault fields range from 1 to 8 and are identified
key
by a number in the upper right corner.) Press the
to view the remaining fields. The message Modem O.K.
appears if no sequence faults have occurred.
To remove sequence fault records from both the LCD
and nonvolatile memory, select Clear. The message
Modem O.K. appears.
Record Status
Display Clear
F1
F2
F3
To exit this function and remain in the Status branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
To display sequence faults, select Display.
AT Command Equivalent
There is no AT command for Record.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
6-5
Test Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loc Analog Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rem Digital Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loc Digital Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview
The Test branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to
initiate various modem tests. Use these tests if you are
having data communication problems, such as periodic
character loss, random errors, or constant format errors.
By the process of elimination, you can usually isolate the
fault in your system.
7
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
There are six selections under Test: Abort, Self
(Self-Test), Loc Analog Loop (Local Analog Loopback),
Rem Digital Loop (Remote Digital Loopback), Loc
Digital Loop (Local Digital Loopback), and Pattern. The
only tests that can operate concurrently are Pattern with a
Local Analog Loopback and Pattern with a Remote
Digital Loopback. If any test is operating, besides the two
combinations just mentioned, it must be canceled before
starting another test.
The Test branch only initiates and cancels tests. If any
parameters need to be set, refer to the Tests section
discussed in Chapter 7, Configure Branch.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
7-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Test Branch
Self
To access the Test branch from the Top-Level menu,
make the following selections:
Self performs an internal self-test of the modem, which
takes less than a minute to complete. The modem must be
offline (not connected with another modem), otherwise
Invalid Command appears. This test is not valid in
Remote mode and does not appear on the LCD of either
modem when in Remote mode.
Idle : 28.8
Status
F1
Press the
Test
F2
To access Self from the Test branch, make the
following selection:
F3
Test :
Abort
key until Test appears. Select Test.
Abort
F1
Abort ends any test that is in progress and brings the
modem back to the normal mode of operation.
Confirmation is provided by the Command Complete
message.
Test :
Abort
F1
F2
F3
Select Self. (All LCD cells and DCP status indicators
light.)
If the modem passes self-test, Pass appears on the
LCD. If it fails, Failed appears. If the modem fails,
contact your service representative.
>
Self
F2
>
Self
If Invalid Command appears on the LCD, then
another test is in progress or the modem is operating on
dial lines. Select Abort to clear the current test, or
disconnect to clear the dial lines, and then choose Self.
F3
If the modem receives a ring signal during this test, the
test is cancelled and the RI Abort message appears.
Select Abort.
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
Test : Abort
Command Complete
F1
F2
F3
AT Command Equivalent
The modem stops all tests currently in progress and
displays the Command Complete status message on the
LCD. To exit this function and remain in the Test branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
The AT command is &T9.
AT Command Equivalent
The AT command is &T0.
7-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Test Branch
Loc Analog Loop
Loc Analog Loop performs a local analog loopback
(CCITT V.54 Loop 3), Figure 7-1, that verifies modem
operation as well as the connection between the DTE and
modem. The modem must be offline and in synchronous
or asynchronous Direct mode to perform this test,
otherwise Invalid Command appears.
To access Loc Analog Loop from the Test branch,
make the following selections:
Test :
Loc_Analog_Loop
F1
F2
Test : Local Loop
Started
F1
F2
F3
The message Started appears on the LCD, and the Test
LED lights for the duration of the test.
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled,
Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test. If it is
disabled, the test operates until aborted. For more
information on the Test Timeout configuration option,
refer to the Tests section in Chapter 7, Configure Branch.
A Ring Indicate during this test can cause errors.
F3
Press the
key until Loc Analog Loop appears.
Press any function key to start this test.
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
AT Command Equivalent
The AT command for Local Analog Loopback is &T1.
Figure 7-1. Local Analog Loopback
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
7-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Rem Digital Loop
Rem Digital Loop performs a remote digital loopback
(CCITT V.54 Loop 2), Figure 7-2. This test can verify the
integrity of the local modem, the communications link,
and the remote modem. Any data or pattern entered at the
local DTE is sent to and returned from the remote modem.
For this test to operate properly, the modems must be
online and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode
and, if set for V.34 modulation, must not be in
Asymmetric Rate mode.
To access Rem Digital Loop from the Test branch,
make the following selections:
Test :
Rem_Digital_Loop
F1
F2
Test : Remote Loop
Started
F1
F2
F3
The message Started appears on the LCD, and the Test
LED lights for the duration of the test.
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled,
Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test. If it is
disabled, the test operates until aborted. For more
information on the Test Timeout configuration option,
refer to the Tests section in Chapter 7.
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
F3
AT Command Equivalent
Press the
key until Rem Digital Loop appears.
Press any function key to start this test.
The AT command for Remote Loopback is &T6.
Figure 7-2. Remote Digital Loopback
7-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Test Branch
Loc Digital Loop
Loc Digital Loop is issued by a local modem and
forces it to loopback any data received from the remote
modem (Figure 7-3). (This test operates the same as a
CCITT V.54 Loop 2 except it is issued at your modem.)
This is useful if a remote modem is incapable of initiating
a remote digital loopback from its location. For this test to
operate properly, the modems must be online and in
Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode and, if set for
V.34 modulation, must not be in Asymmetric Rate mode.
To access Loc Digital Loop from the Test branch, make
the following selections:
F2
F1
F2
F3
The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test
LED lights.
If the message Invalid Command appears on the
LCD, then another test is in progress. Select Abort to clear
the current test and then select Loc Digital Loop.
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled,
Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the LCD. If it is
disabled, the test operates until aborted. For more
information on the Test Timeout configuration option,
refer to the Tests section in Chapter 7.
Test :
Loc_Digital_Loop
F1
Test : Digitl Loop
Started
F3
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
Press the
key until Loc Digital Loop appears. Press
any function key to start this test.
AT Command Equivalent
The AT command for Local Digital Loopback is &T3.
Figure 7-3. Local Digital Loopback
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
7-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Pattern
Pattern can transmit and receive a 511 bit error rate test
pattern. It can also be used with a local analog loopback
or a remote digital loopback to simulate data passing
through the modem. For this test to operate properly, the
modems must be online and in Synchronous or
Asynchronous Direct mode. Otherwise, the message
Invalid:Bffr Mde appears when this test is started.
(See Figures 7-4 through 7-6.)
Figure 7-4. Pattern Test and Local Analog
Loopback Test
Figure 7-5. Pattern Test and Remote Digital Loopback Test
Figure 7-6. End-to-End Pattern Test
7-6
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Test Branch
To access Pattern from the Test branch, make the
following selections:
Test :
Pattern
F1
Press the
key to display BlksRcvd=xxxxxxx,
number of blocks of data received.
The Pattern test can be exited and reentered without
restarting the test. The BlksErrd and BlksRcvd continue
counting.
>
F2
F3
Press the
key until Pattern appears. Select Pattern
to start this test.
Test : Pattern
>
Blks Errd = xxxxxxx
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled,
Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test. If it is
disabled, the test operates until aborted. For more
information on the Test Timeout configuration option,
refer to the Tests section of Chapter 7, Configure Branch.
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
AT Command Equivalent
F1
F2
F3
The AT command for Pattern is &T2.
BlksErrd=xxxxxxx displays the number of blocks of
data found in error (block size is 1000 bits per block). The
message NoSync can appear as a value for BlksErrd while
the modem’s receiver is synchronizing. The message
OvrFlw can appear as the value for BlksErrd if the
counter overflows.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
7-7
Configure Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing and Saving a Configuration Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTE Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTE Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leased Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V.42/MNP/Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview
After installing a 3800Plus modem, you set its
software configuration options using either the diagnostic
control panel (DCP) or the AT command set. This chapter
describes how to access and use the Configure branch of
the Top-Level menu via the DCP.
The Configure branch accesses the Edit Area which is
a work space where you view and change any
configuration options (straps). These configuration
options are loaded to the Edit Area from one of five
configuration option areas: Active (Operating), Active
(Saved), Customer 1, Customer 2, or Factory.
• Active (Operating) is a configuration area
containing configuration options currently used by
the modem. When the modem is powered on or
when a save is performed, the contents of Active
(Saved) are loaded into Active (Operating). Any
changes made using AT commands directly affect
this configuration area.
8-1
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-7
8-14
8-19
8-23
8-27
8-31
8-37
8-39
8-42
• Customer 1 and Customer 2 are two additional
read and write (changeable) configuration areas
where you can create and store additional
configurations for specific applications.
• Factory is a read-only (unchangeable)
configuration area containing sets of predefined
configuration options for Async Dial, Sync Dial,
Sync Leased (Answer/Originate), UNIX Dial,
Cellular (Mobile), and Cellular (PSTN). These
sets contain the most commonly used configuration
options for modems installed in these hardware
environments, and give you a head start in
configuring your modem. Factory default settings
are listed in Appendix G.
• Active (Saved) is a read from and write to
configuration option area containing the most
recently saved changes made to any configuration
options. In the event of power loss or reset, the
modem retrieves these settings from nonvolatile
memory.
3980-A2-GB30-20
8
November 1996
NOTE
If you are using AT commands,
a period of time can exist in
which the contents of Active
(Operating) and Active (Saved)
differ. Once you issue an
AT&W0 (write) command,
however, the two storage areas
are identical.
8-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Figures 8-1 and 8-2 graphically display the interaction
between the edit area and configuration areas as viewed
from the perspective of the DCP and the AT command set.
CONTENTS OF Active (Saved) ARE AUTOMATICALLY COPIED TO
Active (Operating) WHEN A SAVE IS COMMANDED VIA THE DCP,
ON A RESET, OR ON POWER-UP
Active (Operating)
Active (Saved)
Customer 1
Customer 2
Load Edit
Area From
Factory
• Async Dial
• Sync Dial
• Sync Leased
(Answer/Originate)
• UNIX Dial
• Cellular (Mobile)
• Cellular (PSTN)
EDIT AREA
ALLOWS YOU TO VIEW AND EDIT
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
Save
To
ANY CHANGES MADE TO
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
ARE SAVED TO Active (Saved),
Customer 1, OR Customer 2
494-13079-02
Figure 8-1. DCP Configuration Process
8-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Active (Saved)
(ATZ0, ATZ3)
Customer 1
(ATZ1)
Customer 2
(ATZ2)
Factory
• Async Dial
(AT&F0)
• Sync Dial
(AT&F1)
• Sync
Leased
Answer
(AT&F2)
LOAD Active (Operating)
USING ATZ OR AT&F
COMMAND
• UNIX Dial
(AT&F3)
• Sync Leased
Originate
(AT&F4)
• Cellular
(Mobile) (AT&F5)
• Cellular
(PSTN) (AT&F6)
NOTE
ON POWER-UP, Active
(Saved) IS LOADED TO
Active (Operating)
Active (Operating)
CHANGES MADE USING ANY AT
COMMAND IMMEDIATELY AFFECT
MODEM OPERATION
USE AT&W COMMAND TO SAVE
CHANGES TO Active (Saved),
Customer 1, OR Customer 2
NOTE
THE AT&W COMMAND IS
DISABLED IF THE
StrapsWhenDisc
CONFIGURATION OPTION
IS SET TO Reload
Active (Saved)
(AT&W0)
Customer 1
(AT&W1)
Customer 2
(AT&W2)
494-13080-02
Figure 8-2. AT Command Configuration Process
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Configure Branch
The Configure branch consists of the following three
levels:
The Configure branch of the Top-Level menu contains
all of the modem’s configuration options (straps) which
determine how the modem operates. These configuration
options are accessed by scrolling down and across various
levels of the Configure branch.
• Ld EditArea frm. Allows the selection of the
Active (Operating), Active (Saved), Customer 1,
Customer 2, and Factory configuration areas.
• Choose Function. Allows you to make changes
(Edit) to existing configuration options or write
(Save) these changes to either the Active (Saved),
Customer 1, or Customer 2 configuration area.
• Edit Strap Group. Contains the eight software
configuration option groups that determine how the
modem operates.
8-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Editing and Saving a Configuration Option
The following example shows how to change the
Remote Access Password using the DCP. (If you ever
intend to access another 3800Plus Series modem via the
Remote branch of the Top-Level menu, the Remote
Access Password must be the same for both modems.) By
following these procedures you learn how to load a
factory preset configuration area (in this case, Async
Dial), how to edit a configuration option (Remote Access
Password), and how to save changes to a configuration
area (Active (Saved)). The shaded key indicates what key
to press.
Choose Function
Edit
Save
F1
F1
Edit StrapGroup
DTE_Interface
F2
>
F3
Configure
F2
Scroll to and select the Misc configuration options
group.
F3
Edit StrapGroup
<
Test
Misc
Select Configure from the Top-Level menu.
Ld EditArea frm
Activ (Operating)
F1
F3
Select Edit.
F1
Idle : 28.8
Test
F2
F2
F1
>
F2
F3
F3
StrapsWhenDisc
>
Nxt
No_Change
Ld EditArea frm
Factory
F1
F2
F1
<
RemAccssPasswrd
NxtąĄ°00000000
Select the Factory configuration area.
F1
F2
F1
>
F3
F3
Select Nxt until RemAccssPasswrd appears.
F3
Ld Fact Preset :
Async_Dial
F2
F2
F3
Select the F2 (°) key to increment password values.
Select Async_Dial.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
RemAccssPasswrd
NxtąĄ°00000000
F1
Press the
position.
F2
Sav EditArea to
Active (Saved)
F3
F1
key to move the cursor to the next
F2
Select the
key to exit to the Top-Level menu or
select the
key to remain in the Configure branch.
F3
Summary
Continue this sequence until you have entered the new
password value.
To save the new password to a configuration area,
make the following selections.
RemAccssPasswrd
NxtąĄ°12345678
F1
Press the
F2
F3
key to scroll up (twice).
Choose Function
Edit
Save
F1
Select Save.
F2
F3
F3
Select a configuration area (Active (Saved),
key. Press
Customer 1, or Customer 2) by using the
F1 or F2 to save the changes.
RemAccssPasswrd
NxtąĄ°12345678
F1
F2
>
When using the DCP to edit configuration options,
keep the following in mind:
• Nxt has two functions. First, it indicates that more
configuration options are available within that
group. These are accessed by selecting Nxt
(pressing F1) and scrolling down to the next
configuration option. Second, it indicates that what
is displayed on the LCD is the current setting. If
you scroll left or right, Nxt disappears and
reappears if a new value is selected.
• End appears when you have scrolled down to the
last configuration option available in that group.
Selecting End returns you to the top of the
configuration group. You are free to enter that
group again or scroll left or right to the next
configuration options group.
key takes you one step up in the Configure
• The
branch each time it is pressed.
• The
key causes you to exit the Configure
branch and return to the Top-Level menu. If any
changes are made to configuration options, the DCP
allows you to save these changes to either the
Active (Saved), Customer 1, or Customer 2
configuration areas.
• The
LCD.
and
keys move selections across the
• The function keys (F1, F2, F3) select the LCD
choice that appears above that function key.
8-6
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Configuration Tables
DTE Interface
The modem’s configuration options are arranged into
eight groups based upon functionality: DTE
Interface (Table 8-1), DTE Dialer (Table 8-2),
Line Dialer (Table 8-3), Dial Line (Table 8-4),
Leased Line (Table 8-5), V.42/MNP/Buffer (Table 8-6),
Tests (Table 8-7), and Misc (Table 8-8).
The DTE Interface configuration options contain
RS-232D (CCITT V.24) and asynchronous character
format information essential for maintaining a connection
and for transmitting data between the DTE and the
modem.
Throughout these tables, two selections frequently
appear on the LCD: Enable and Disable. Unless otherwise
stated, Enable selects a configuration option and makes it
available for use; Disable makes a configuration option
unavailable for use.
The remainder of this chapter discusses each
configuration options group in detail, listing factory
defaults, definitions, and AT command equivalents.
Table 8-1 shows each DTE Interface configuration
option as it appears on the LCD, with the Async Dial
factory default setting (the default value if the modem is
just being installed) shown following the colon (:) on the
first line and with all available selections listed on the
second line. Following this is a description of the
configuration option, a description of the available
selections, and any equivalent AT commands.
Table 8-1
(1 of 7)
DTE Interface Configuration Options
Async/Sync Mode: Async
Nxt Async Sync
Asynchronous/Synchronous Mode. Determines whether the modem operates in Asynchronous mode or Synchronous
mode. If the AT command set is enabled and this configuration option is set for Sync, then the modem operates in Async
mode when offline.
For Async Dial and UNIX Dial, Async is the factory default. For Sync Dial and Sync Leased, Sync is the factory default.
AT command equivalents are &Mn and &Qn.
*Async DTE Rate:19200
Nxt 19200 115200 76800
57600 38400 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 0–300
Asynchronous DTE Data Rate. Identifies the asynchronous DTE’s operating rate to the modem. Data rates from
115,200 bps to 300 bps are supported.
To originate calls in 76,800 bps Sun Workstationr environments, use either DCP dialing, DTR dialing, or handset dialing.
The modem does not support AT command dialing at this data rate.
To prevent losing data in 115,200 bps applications, a 16650 (or faster) UART on the PC’s serial port is required, as well
as a communications package which can take advantage of its 16-byte buffer. In addition, a 386 25-MHz (or faster) PC is
required, and the RS-232 cable must be 6 feet or less to minimize capacitance.
NOTE: This configuration option is ignored in Async Direct mode and synchronous mode since the DTE rate always
equals the VF rate.
The factory default is 19200 bps.
There is no AT command equivalent; AT prefix determines Async DTE Rate.
* This configuration option only appears if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-7
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-1
(2 of 7)
DTE Interface Configuration Options
*Async #Data Bits: 8
Nxt 8 7 9(DirectMde) 6(DirectMde)
Asynchronous Number of Data Bits. Determines if the asynchronous data length is composed of 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits.
This data length excludes start, parity, and stop bits.
8 – Sets data length to 8 data bits. Sets data length to 8 data bits. Sets data length to 8 data bits.
7 – Sets data length to 7 data bits.
9(DirectMode) – Sets data length to 9 data bits. Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode.
6(DirectMode) – Sets data length to 6 data bits. Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode.
The factory default is 8 data bits.
NOTE: If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT or V.25bis Async, then the total character size must
equal 10 bits (see DTE Dialer configuration options group). Total character size consists of an asynchronous
start bit, asynchronous number of data bits, parity bits, and asynchronous stop bits. V.25bis Async must use
7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit. The total character size for Error Control mode or Buffer mode must
be 10 bits or less. The total character size for Direct mode must be 11 bits or less.
There is no AT command equivalent; AT prefix determines the async character length.
*Asyn Parity Bit: None
Nxt None Even Odd
Mark Space
Asynchronous Parity Bit. Determines type of asynchronous parity bit. The parity of the DTE must match the parity of the
modem. Parity options include None, Even, Odd, Mark, or Space.
None – No parity bit is used.
Even – Parity bit is set so that total number of 1’s in data bits plus parity bit is even.
Odd – Parity bit is set so that total number of 1’s in data bits plus parity bit is odd.
Mark – Parity bit is always set to 1. Only valid if Async #Data Bits configuration option is set to 7.
Space – Parity bit is always set to 0. Only valid if Async #Data Bits configuration option is set to 7.
The factory default is None.
NOTE: If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT or V.25bis Async, then the total character size must
equal 10 bits (see DTE Dialer configuration options group). Total character size consists of an asynchronous
start bit, asynchronous number of data bits, parity bits, and asynchronous stop bits. V.25bis Async must use
7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit. The total character size for Error Control mode or Buffer mode must
be 10 bits or less. The total character size for Direct mode must be 11 bits or less.
There is no AT command equivalent; AT prefix determines parity of the async character.
*Asyn #Stop Bits: 1
Nxt 1 2
Asynchronous Number of Stop Bits. Selects 1 or 2 bits to signal the end of an asynchronous character.
The factory default is 1.
NOTE: If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT or V.25bis Async, then the total character size must
equal 10 bits (see DTE Dialer configuration options group). Total character size consists of an asynchronous
start bit, asynchronous number of data bits, parity bits, and asynchronous stop bits. V.25bis Async must use
7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit. The total character size for Error Control mode or Buffer mode must
be 10 bits or less. The total character size for Direct mode must be 11 bits or less.
There is no AT command equivalent; AT prefix determines the number of stop bits via autobauding.
* This configuration option only appears if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.
8-8
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-1
(3 of 7)
DTE Interface Configuration Options
DTR Action: Ignore
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Ignore CntrlsOnHook Off=ReloadStrp Off=CmdMode
Data Terminal Ready Action. DTR is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating that the DTE is connected and ready
for operation.
Standard RS232 – Allows the DTE to control DTR to the modem as specified in RS-232D and CCITT V.24
specifications. If this signal is not present, the modem will not answer or dial.
Ignore – Modem assumes DTR is always ON. This is used when DTE does not provide DTR to the modem.
CntrlsOnHook – Modem does not disconnect from the VF line during an active call until DTR is lowered by the attached
DTE. This setting is required for applications in which the host processor must reset itself for the next session before the
current session is terminated. The setting is ignored if the modem receives a disconnect command from the DCP or from
the COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS.
Off=ReloadStrp – Like Standard RS232, except that when DTR is lowered the modem loads the Active (Saved) area
into the Active (Operating) area.
Off=CmdMode – When the modem is online and DTR is Off for longer than the period specified by the S25 register, the
modem enters online Command mode. The ATO command must be issued to return to data mode. This setting has the
same effect as Ignore if AT commands are disabled.
NOTE: If V.25bis mode is used, then this configuration option must be set for Stndrd_RS232. The DTE must provide
DTR to dial or answer a call.
When operating over the dial network, this selection forces DTR Action to behave as CT108/2 (Data Terminal Ready). If
DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to DTR=Direct 1, then DTR Action behaves as CT108/1 (Connect Data Set
to Line).
For Async Dial, Sync Leased, and UNIX Dial, Ignore is the factory default.
For Sync Dial, Stndrd_RS232 is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is &Dn.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-9
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-1
(4 of 7)
DTE Interface Configuration Options
DSR Control: Forced_On
Nxt Forced_On Stndrd_RS232
WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR On_Early
Delay_ToData DialBkToggle
Data Data Set Ready Control. DSR is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating the modem is connected and ready
for operation.
Forced On – Forces DSR output ON constantly. This is usually used for leased-line applications and when the DTE
requires DSR to always be ON.
Standard RS232 – Allows the modem to control DSR to the DTE. The modem raises DSR when it begins the
handshake process. DSR lowers upon disconnect. The modem is not ready to receive data until DSR, CTS, and LSD
are active.
An ON state indicates to the DTE that the modem is ready to receive data. An Off state indicates that the modem is not
ready to receive data, and the DTE will not send data to the modem. During a Local Analog Loop and a Remote Digital
Loop, DSR is ON.
Wink When Disconnect – DSR is normally forced ON, but is turned Off for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect.
Follows DTR – When the modem receives DTR from the DTE, it sends DSR to the DTE.
On Early – DSR is low when the modem is in the idle state. DSR goes high immediately upon a command to enter Data
mode. This setting is required for some modem pooling applications.
Delay to Data – Operation is similar to the Standard RS232 setting except that DSR does not turn ON until the modem
enters Data mode. Normally, the modem raises DSR when it begins the handshaking process.
Use this setting when the DTE cannot operate with a long DSR-to-CTS delay (common for V.32bis modulation) or when
dial access security is enabled and requires a DTE-side password entry. Often, the DTE cannot accept the long delay
between DSR and CTS turning ON due to the remote user entering the DTE-side password.
Dial Backup Toggle – DSR is turned Off during a dial backup attempt in Leased mode, and ON when such an attempt
completes. DSR is also turned Off when a disconnect begins, and turned ON when the disconnect is complete.
For Async Dial and UNIX Dial, Forced_On is the factory default.
For Sync Dial and Sync Leased, Stndrd_RS232 is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is &Sn.
8-10
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-1
(5 of 7)
DTE Interface Configuration Options
RTS Action: Ignore
Nxt Ignore Stndrd_RS232
Sim_Cntl_Car
Cntl_Car
Request-to-Send Action. RTS is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating the DTE has data to send to the modem.
Ignore – Modem assumes RTS is always ON. Use this selection when the DTE does not provide RTS to the modem.
Standard RS232 – Allows the DTE to control RTS to the modem in normal RS-232D operation. RTS must be ON for the
DTE to transmit to the modem.
Simulated Control Carrier – RTS input controls the remote modem’s LSD signal. This is used for DTEs that require
Line Signal Detect (LSD) to toggle ON and Off to simulate half-duplex operation. Valid only in Synchronous mode and
Asynchronous Direct mode.
NOTE: If RTS Action is set for simulated control carrier, then the remote modem’s LSD Control configuration option
must be set for Simulated Control Carrier. Simulated Control Carrier conforms to V.13 specifications. This
setting is ignored when the modem is configured for Asynchronous mode and RTS/CTS flow control is selected.
Control Carrier – Allows the DTE’s RTS signal to control the modem’s carrier signal. When RTS is ON, carrier is
present on the VF line. When RTS turns Off, carrier is no longer present. This is only valid for V.29 leased-line
modulation.
For Async Dial and UNIX Dial, Ignore is the factory default.
For Sync Dial and Sync Leased, Stndrd_RS232 is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is &Rn.
CTS Control: Forced_On
Nxt Forced_On Stndrd_RS232
WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR
Clear-to-Send Control. CTS is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating that it can accept data from the DTE.
NOTE: When CTS flow control or CTS/RTS flow control is enabled, CTS will turn ON and Off regardless of the setting
of CTS Control.
Forced On – CTS is forced ON at all times. Use this selection for most asynchronous applications.
Standard RS232 – In Synchronous mode, forces the state of CTS to follow the state of RTS in normal RS-232D
operation. The minimum time that elapses between CTS and RTS is determined by the RTS/CTS Delay configuration
option. Use this setting for most synchronous applications.
In AT Command mode, CTS (which is ON in Idle mode) goes Off just prior to DSR going active, and goes ON when the
modem enters Data mode. This operation prevents losing data in applications which begin transmitting as soon as DSR
and CTS are both active.
Wink When Disconnect – CTS is normally forced ON, but is turned Off for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect. Use this
for most UNIXr applications.
Follows DTR – The state of CTS follows the state of DTR. When DTR turns ON, CTS turns ON. When DTR turns Off,
CTS turns Off.
For Async Dial, Forced On is the factory default.
For Sync Dial and Sync Leased, Stndrd_RS232 is the factory default.
For UNIX Dial, WinkWhenDisc is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is \Dn.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-11
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-1
(6 of 7)
DTE Interface Configuration Options
RTS/CTS Delay: 0 msec
Nxt 0msec 10msec 50msec 150msec 600msec
Request-to-Send/Clear-to-Send Delay. RTS/CTS Delay sets the delay time between the modem receiving RTS from the
DTE and the modem sending CTS to the DTE.
This delay is only valid in Async Direct mode and synchronous applications when it is necessary to have a short delay
between the time the DTE raises RTS and the time the modem presents CTS to allow the DTE to send data.
NOTE: For this configuration option to be valid, both the RTS Action and the CTS Control configuration options must be
set for Stndrd RS232. If RTS Action is set for Ignore, RTS is always ON and this configuration option has no
effect.
The factory default is 0 milliseconds.
AT command equivalent is S-register S26=n.
LSD Control: Stndrd_RS232
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR
Sim_Cntl_Car =DTR/DiscOff BridgeRetrain
Line Signal Detect Control. LSD is a signal indicating that the carrier signal is being received from the remote modem. It
is normally turned Off to the DTE when the power level of the received carrier signal drops below the carrier detect
threshold.
Standard RS232 – LSD is ON when the modem detects the remote modem’s carrier signal. LSD turns Off when the
carrier signal strength drops below carrier detect threshold.
Forced On – Forces LSD to be ON at all times.
Wink When Disconnect – LSD is normally forced ON, but can be turned Off for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect. This
is used for UNIXr DTEs.
Follows DTR – The state of LSD follows the state of DTR. When DTR turns ON, LSD turns ON. When DTR turns Off,
LSD turns Off.
Simulated Control Carrier – LSD follows the state of RTS of the remote DTE via the V.13 simulated control carrier
signaling. This is required for hosts that cannot support full-duplex operation. Valid only in Synchronous mode and
Asynchronous Direct mode.
NOTE: If LSD Control is set for simulated control carrier, then the RTS Action configuration option on the remote
modem must be set for Simulated Control Carrier.
=DTR/Disconnect Off – The state of LSD follows the state of DTR except when disconnecting once a connection is
established. In this instance, DTR remains ON and LSD turns Off. DTR must then toggle Off and then ON again for LSD
to turn ON. This setting is required for AT&T DATAKITr dial-out applications.
BridgeRetrain – LSD behaves as if it were set for Standard RS232, except that it is turned off when a retrain condition
lasts longer than 10 seconds, and turned on again when no retrain condition is detected for a period of 10 seconds.
NOTE: If LSD Control is set for =DTR/DiscOff, then the DTR Action configuration option must be set for Stndrd_RS232.
For Async Dial, Sync Dial, and Sync Leased, Stndrd_RS232 is the factory default.
For UNIX Dial, WinkWhenDisc is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is &Cn.
8-12
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-1
(7 of 7)
DTE Interface Configuration Options
TX Clock Source: Internal
Nxt Internal External RXC_Loop
Transmit Clock Source. Determines the source of timing for synchronous data transmitted from the DTE.
Internal – The transmit data’s clock source is derived from the modem’s internal clock and output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the
RS-232D interface.
External – The transmit data’s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 (EXT) on the RS-232D interface. This
configuration option automatically disables Autorate, Automode, and Asymmetric Rate mode when running V.34
modulation.
RXC Loop – The modem’s transmit clock is derived from its received signal and is output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the
RS-232D interface.
NOTE: This configuration option only appears if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Sync.
The factory default is Internal.
AT command equivalent is &Xn.
CT111_Rate Cntl: Disable
Nxt Disable Fallback1 Fallback2
CT111 Rate Control. Allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the RS-232D interface. This configuration
option determines the effect of the DTE Rate control signal. CT111 is also known as CH on the RS-232D interface.
Disable – Disregards CT111 Rate Control.
Fallback1 – Forces the modem to decrease its configured data rate to the next lower data rate when CT111 is Off. Valid
only for V.32bis, V.33, V.29 modulation. Modem will only fall back within the same modulation scheme. When CT111
turns ON, the modem returns to its previous data rate.
Fallback2 – Forces the modem to decrease two data rates while remaining in the same modulation scheme. When
CT111 turns ON, the modem returns to its previous data rate.
NOTE: This configuration option is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode. For proper operation,
disable the Autorate and Automode configuration options. CT111 Rate Control is not supported with V.34.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S61=n.
DTE Rate=VF: Disable
End Disable Enable
DTE Rate = VF Rate. Forces the data rate of the connection between the DTE (computer) and the modem to be the
same as the VF (telephone line) rate.
Disable – The DTE rate is the value of the Async DTE Rate configuration option.
Enable – The DTE rate is identical with the VF rate.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S90=n.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-13
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
DTE Dialer
Table 8-2 shows each DTE Dialer configuration option
as it appears on the LCD, with the Async Dial factory
default setting (the default value if the modem is just
being installed) shown following the colon (:) on the first
line and with all available selections listed on the second
line. Following this is a description of the configuration
option, a description of the available selections, and any
equivalent AT commands.
The DTE Dialer configuration options establish the
DTE-to-modem protocol for call establishment and
control.
Table 8-2
(1 of 5)
DTE Dialer Configuration Options
DTE Dialer Type: AT
Nxt AT Disable V25bis_Async V25bis_Bsync V25bis_HDLC
DTR=Dirs
AT&T_Exclusv
Data Terminal Equipment Dialer Type. Identifies to the modem the type of dialing method and protocol used by the DTE.
AT – Allows AT command protocol to be used as a method for entering commands and dialing when used in an
asynchronous application.
NOTE: The modem will not respond to AT commands if DTE Dialer Type is not set for AT.
Disable – Disables any type of DTE dialing method. Dialing can only be performed using the DCP’s Dial command or
attached telephone.
V.25bis Async – Selects V.25bis Async as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem. The character length
must be 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit.
V.25bis Bisync – Selects V.25bis Bisync as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem. This is also known as
character-oriented protocol. This framing protocol uses two synchronous control characters and a start-of-text control
character before the text block and an end-of-text control character after the text block. The character length must be
7 data bits with odd parity and 1 stop bit.
V.25bis HDLC – Selects V.25bis HDLC as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem. This is also known as
bit-oriented protocol. This framing protocol uses flag, address and control characters before the text block and a frame
sequence check and flag after the text block.
DTR=Dirs – Allows the modem to automatically dial the number stored in directory location 1 whenever DTR turns ON.
NOTE: DTR dialing should not be used if dial access security is enabled.
AT&T Exclusive – Enables a subset of the proprietary AT&T command set, which is required for some applications that
use AT&T equipment. Currently, the only application supported is AT&T DATAKIT t.
For Async Dial and UNIX Dial, AT is the factory default.
For Sync Dial and Sync Leased, Disable is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is &Mn and &Qn.
8-14
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-2
(2 of 5)
DTE Dialer Configuration Options
*AT Escape Char: 043 ASCI
Nxt " 043 ASCI
AT Escape Character. The escape sequence (+++) allows you to move back and forth between Command mode and
Data mode. The ASCII value of the escape character (43 ASCII) can be set to any ASCII value from 0 ASCII to
255 ASCII. However, the escape character is disabled if a value greater than 127 ASCII is entered. When disabled, the
call must be disconnected to return to Command mode.
The factory default is 43 (ASCII AT escape character).
AT command equivalent is S-register S2=n.
*Escape GuardTim: 1sec
Nxt 1sec 200msec 400msec 600msec 800msec 2sec
Escape Guard Time. Determines the length of the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued. The
guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters.
The factory default is 1 second.
AT command equivalent is S-register S12=n.
*BreakForceEscap:
Disable Nxt Disable Enable
Break Forces Escape. Determines whether or not the modem should enter Command mode when it receives a break
character from the DTE.
Disable – A break character is sent to the remote end.
Enable – Modem escapes into AT Command mode, and a break character is not sent to the remote end.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is \Kn.
*CommandCharEcho: Enable
Nxt EnableDisable
Command Character Echo. Controls whether or not characters are echoed back to the DTE when the modem is in
Command mode.
The factory default is Enable.
AT command equivalent is En.
*CarriageRtn Char: 013 ASCI
Nxt ↑ 013 ASCI
Carriage Return Character. Allows you to change the ASCII character used to terminate an AT command to any ASCII
value from 0 to 127.
The factory default is 13 (ASCII carriage return).
AT command equivalent is S-register S3=n.
* This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-15
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-2
(3 of 5)
DTE Dialer Configuration Options
*Backspace Char: 008 ASCI
Nxt ↑ 008 ASCI
Backspace Character. Sets the character used to perform a backspace in Command mode.
The factory default is 08 (ASCII backspace character).
AT command equivalent is S-register S5=n.
*Linefeed Char: 010 ASCI
Nxt ↑ 010 ASCI
Line Feed Character. Sets the character used to perform a line feed in Command mode for responses from the modem.
The factory default is 10 (ASCII line feed character).
AT command equivalent is S-register S4=n.
*Result Codes: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable EnableInOrig
Result Codes. Result codes are informational messages (such as Connect and Ring) sent from the modem and
displayed on the asynchronous DTE terminal. (For a list of Result Codes, refer to Table 11-1 in Chapter 11,
AT Commands and S-registers.)
Enable – Modem sends result codes to the DTE.
Disable – Modem does not send result codes to the DTE.
EnableInOrig – For UNIXr applications, enable result codes only on the originating modem. This prevents the DTE on
the answer side from interpreting result codes as login attempts.
For Async Dial, Enable is the factory default.
For UNIX Dial, EnableInOrig is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is Qn.
*ExtendResltCode: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable Add/EC
Add/V42,MNP
Use_DTE_Rate
Extended Result Codes. Informational messages such as VF data rate and Error Control are displayed with the result
codes. (For a list of Extended Result Codes, refer to Table 11-1 in Chapter 11, AT Commands and S-registers.)
Enable – NO DIALTONE, BUSY, NO ANSWER, and CONNECT xxxx (xxxx = VF data rate) are displayed along with
result codes listed in Table 11-1 in Chapter 11.
Disable – Only OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, and ERROR result codes appear.
NOTE: NO DIALTONE is valid only if Dial Tone Detect configuration option is enabled. BUSY appears if Busy Detect
configuration option is enabled.
Add/EC – Places the EC suffix after the result code text if error control is used. For example, CONNECT 9600/EC
Add/V.42, MNP – Places either the /V.42 or /MNP suffix after the result code text if data compression is used. For
example, CONNECT 9600/V42b.
Use DTE Rate – Allows the DTE rate to be displayed in the Connect message instead of the line rate. This feature is
required in some modem pooling applications.
The factory default is Enable.
AT command equivalent is Xn.
* This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.
8-16
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-2
(4 of 5)
DTE Dialer Configuration Options
*ResultCode Form: Words
Nxt Words Numbers (1)
Numbers (2)
Result Codes Format. Controls whether or not result codes appear as words or as numeric codes. Some DTEs do not
recognize Result Codes as words; therefore, numbers are required. The Numbers (2) format is required for some
modem pooling applications. (For a list of Result Codes, refer to Appendix B.)
The factory default is Words.
AT command equivalent is Vn.
*AT Cmnd Mode: Normal
Nxt Normal No_ERROR
NoStrapOrERR
AT Command Mode. Determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid AT commands.
NOTE: Since this configuration option affects AT commands, it cannot be changed by the AT&F command. However, it
can be changed by selecting a factory preset configuration via the DCP.
Normal – Allows normal operation of the AT command set. The modem acts upon all valid AT commands and issues the
ERROR result code for invalid commands. If a string with multiple commands is entered, then an invalid command within
that string will prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands.
No ERROR – Operates similar to Normal mode, however, the modem does not issue an ERROR result code for invalid
commands. When an invalid command equivalent is encountered, the modem ignores it and issues the OK result code.
If a string with multiple commands is entered, then an invalid command within that string will not prevent the execution of
subsequent valid commands.
No Strap or ERROR – Ignores all AT commands (including valid commands) that cause a configuration option to
change. Only nonconfiguring commands (for example ATD, ATA, and ATI) are executed; the ERROR result code is
never returned.
The factory default is Normal.
AT command equivalent is S-register S84=n
V25bis Coding: ASCII
Nxt ASCII EBCDIC
V.25bis Coding. Identifies to the modem whether the DTE is using ASCII code or EBCDIC code for V.25bis commands.
The modem responds to the DTE using the same coding.
NOTE: This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V25bis HDLC or V25bis Bisync.
The factory default is ASCII.
AT command equivalent is S-register S62=n.
* This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-17
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-2
(5 of 5)
DTE Dialer Configuration Options
V25bis IdleFill: Mark
Nxt Mark Flag
V.25bis Idle Fill. Determines whether a mark or flag is used as an idle fill character for the DTE. The modem responds to
the DTE using the same idle fill.
NOTE: This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V25bis HDLC.
The factory default is Mark.
AT command equivalent is S-register S63=n.
V.25b NewLineChr: CR+LF
Nxt CR+LF CR LF
V.25bis New Line Character. Sets the modem for the command line terminator used by the DTE in V.25bis Async mode.
The modem responds to the DTE using the same line terminator.
NOTE: This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V25bis Async.
The factory default is CR+LF.
AT command equivalent is S-register S64=n.
DTR Cont Repeat: Disable
End Disable Enable
DTR Cont Repeat. Determines whether automatic redialing stops after the directory locations defined by DTR Auto
Redial (S37) have all been tried unsuccessfully once. If DTR Cont Repeat is enabled, automatic redialing starts again
with directory location 1. The default is Disable.
A redial attempt is made in response to a bad phone number, a busy signal, no answer, or no quiet answer. However, a
lockout from redialing occurs if ten successive failing call attempts are made to the same number.
DTR Cont Repeat is accessible only if the DTE Dialer Type is DTR=Dirs.
Disable – Automatic redialing will not be repeated.
Enable – Automatic will be repeated if necessary.
AT command equivalent is S-register S38=n.
8-18
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Line Dialer
The Line Dialer configuration options establish
parameters used by the modem to answer or originate
calls.
Table 8-3 shows each Line Dialer configuration option
as it appears on the LCD, with the Async Dial factory
default setting (the default value if the modem is just
being installed) shown following the colon (:) on the first
line and with all available selections listed on the second
line. Following this is a description of the configuration
option, a description of the available selections, and any
equivalent AT commands.
Table 8-3
(1 of 4)
Line Dialer Configuration Options
AutoAnswerRing#: 1
Nxt 1 Disable 2 4
6
8
10
Auto-Answer Ring Count. Determines the number of rings necessary before the answering modem answers an incoming
call. For example, if this option is set for 2, then the answering modem answers after the second ring.
NOTE: Although DCP selections are limited (1, 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10), values set by AT commands can display from 1 to
255 rings.
Disable – If selected, the modem must be answered using either the DCP’s Answer command or via AT commands.
The factory default is 1.
AT command equivalent is Sn.
Dialer Type: Tone
Nxt Tone Pulse
Dialer Type. Selects either tone (DTMF) dialing or pulse (rotary) dialing mode.
The factory default is Tone.
AT command equivalents are the Dial command modifiers T and P.
DialTone Detect: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
Dial Tone Detect. Sets the modem for dial tone detection (enable) or blind dialing (disable).
Enable – Modem disconnects the call if a dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds and displays No Dial Tone on both
the LCD and asynchronous DTE terminal.
Disable – Modem dials a call whether or not it detects a dial tone on the line. This is known as blind dialing. The period
of time the modem waits before dialing is specified in the Blind Dial Pause configuration option.
The factory default is Enable.
AT command equivalent is Xn.
Blind Dial Paus: 2sec
Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec
Blind Dial Pause. Determines how long the modem waits before dialing a telephone number when DialTone Detect is
disabled.
NOTE: The Blind Dial Pause configuration option only appears when the Dial Tone Detect configuration option is
disabled.
The factory default is 2sec.
AT command equivalent is S-register S6=n.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-19
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-3
(2 of 4)
Line Dialer Configuration Options
BusyTone Detect: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
Busy Tone Detect. Sets the modem to monitor for Busy Tone (Enable) or ignore Busy Tone (Disable).
This configuration option is normally enabled; however, if the modem receives false busy tones, this configuration option
can be disabled and the modem ignores all busy tones.
The factory default is Enable.
AT command equivalent is Xn.
‘‘,” Pause Time: 2sec
Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec
Pause Time. Determines the number of seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial
command string.
NOTE: Although DCP selections are limited (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 20), values set by the AT commands can display from 0 to
255 seconds.
The factory default is 2sec.
AT command equivalent is S-register S8=n.
NoAnswer Timout: 45sec
Nxt 45sec 30sec 60sec 120sec
No Answer Abort Time-out. Determines the number of seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call
attempt when no answer tone is received.
NOTE: Although DCP selections are limited (30, 45, 60, or 120), values set by AT commands can display from 1 to
255 seconds.
The factory default is 45sec.
AT command equivalent is S-register S7=n.
Fast Disconnect: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
Fast Disconnect. Allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE
or its own diagnostic control panel.
Disable – The modem follows its normal disconnect sequence by issuing a cleardown sequence or long space
disconnect. This is also known as a graceful disconnect since the other modem receives advance notice of a
disconnection.
Enable – Use this setting if the DTE requires that the modem be made available as soon as possible after receiving a
disconnect command.
NOTE: This abrupt method of disconnecting may cause problems with the remote modem, which may interpret the
disconnection as an error instead of a valid disconnect.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S85=n.
8-20
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-3
(3 of 4)
Line Dialer Configuration Options
Long Space Disc: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
Long Space Disconnect. Determines the modem’s response to a continuous spacing condition sent from the remote
modem when it goes on-hook. Issuing a long space is one method of disconnecting a call.
NOTE: This configuration option is ignored when the modem operates in Synchronous mode or Dial Backup mode.
Enable – Modem disconnects if it receives a continuous space from the DTE. The modem’s transmitter will transmit
4 seconds of long space upon a disconnect.
Disable – Modem does not disconnect if it receives a continuous space from the DTE. Modem will not transmit a long
space disconnect.
For Async Dial, UNIX Dial, and Sync Leased, Enable is the factory default.
For Sync Dial, Disable is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is Yn.
No Carrier Disc: 2sec
Nxt 2sec 5sec Disable 10sec 20sec
No Carrier Disconnect. If the modem no longer receives carrier from the remote modem, it disconnects the call. This
configuration option determines how long carrier is Off before the modem disconnects. Loss of carrier is one method of
disconnecting a call.
2, 5, 10, 20 sec – Modem disconnects if carrier turns Off for more than 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, or
20 seconds.
Disable – Modem does not disconnect if carrier turns Off.
The factory default is 2sec.
AT command equivalent is S-register S10=n.
No Data Disc: Disable
Nxt Disable 10min 30min 60min
No Data Disconnect. Forces the modem to disconnect if no data is transmitted or received within a specified amount of
time.
Disable – Modem remains connected despite the lack of data flow.
10, 30, 60 min – Modem disconnects if data is not received or transmitted within 10-minute, 30-minute, or 60-minute
intervals.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is \Tn.
Auto Make Busy: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
Automatic Make Busy. Forces the modem to go off-hook under the following conditions: a local analog loopback is
performed, a self-test is performed, or if the modem is switched to the service line. This configuration option is valid only
with the 3811Plus and does not appear on the LCD of standalone models.
NOTE: This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user’s Private Branch
Exchange (PBX). The Make Busy Network Interface Module (NIM) must be installed on the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier. Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S40=n.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-21
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-3
(4 of 4)
Line Dialer Configuration Options
MakeBusyViaDTR: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
Make Busy Via DTR. Determines if the modem goes off-hook when DTR is Off. Enable this setting if the DTE normally
keeps DTR ON and turns DTR Off when the DTE cannot accept a call.
NOTE: This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user’s Private Branch
Exchange (PBX). For 3811Plus modems, the MakeBusy Network Interface Modules (NIMs) must be installed on
the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S69=n.
DTR Auto Redial
Nxt Dir 1 Dirs1-2
Dirs 1-3
Dirs 1-4
Dirs 1-5
Dirs 1-6
Dirs 1-7
Dirs 1-8
Dirs 1-9
Dirs 1-10
DTR Auto Redial. Defines the number of directory locations the modem may access when prior dialing attempts fail. For
example, the selection Dirs1-10 means that all ten directory locations may be tied. The default is directory location 1
only.
DTR Auto Redial represents the same internal setting as that accessed with the Auto Redial configuration option in the
Leased-Line group. However, DTR Auto Redial is in effect (and can be accessed) only if the DTE Dialer Type is
DTR=Dirs.
Dir 1 – The modem will use only directory location 1 for automatic dial backups.
Dirs 1-2 – The modem will use directory location 2 in the event of call failure using directory location 1.
Dirs 1-3 – The modem will use directory location 3 in the event of call failure using the preceding entries.
S
S
S
S
Dirs 1-10 – The modem will use directory location 10 in the event of call failure using the preceding entries.
AT command equivalent is S37=n.
MI/MIC Dialing: Disable
End Disable Enable
MI/MIC Dialing. Also known as D-Lead signaling, is required by some PBX systems, older data phones, and security
callback systems. It forces the modem into the originate handshake after first dialing a call.
Disable – Modem ignores activity on the MI/MIC contacts.
Enable – (3811Plus only.) When the MI/MIC contacts are closed, the modem goes into talk mode; when the contacts are
open, the modem goes into data mode. A 26-pin D-Lead control connector located on the rear of the 3000 Series Carrier
is used for MI/MIC Dialing for 3811Plus modems.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S83=n.
8-22
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Dial Line
The Dial Line configuration options are used to
configure the modem for operation over dial lines.
Table 8-4 shows each Dial Line configuration option as
it appears on the LCD, with the Async Dial factory default
setting (the default value if the modem is just being
installed) shown following the colon (:) on the first line
and with all available selections listed on the second line.
Following this is a description of the configuration option,
a description of the available selections, and any
equivalent AT commands.
Table 8-4
(1 of 4)
Dial Line Configuration Options
Modulation: V34
Nxt V34 V32bis/terbo V21/V22/BELL
Modulation determines the modem’s primary dial modulation group: V.34; V.32bis and V.32terbo; or V.21, V.22bis, V.22,
Bell 212A, and Bell 103J.
The factory default is V34 (V.34 modulations).
Dial LineRate: 28800(V34)
Nxt 28800(V34) 33600 31200 26400(V34) 24000(V34)
21600(V34) 19200(V34) 16800(V34) 14400(V34) 12000(V34) 9600(V34) 7200(V34) 4800(V34) 2400(V34)
- OR Nxt 19200(V32t) 16800(V32t) 14400(V32b) 12000(V32b) 9600(V32b) 7200(V32b) 4800(V32b)
- OR Nxt 2400(V22bis) 1200(V22) 1200(212A) 0–300(V21) 0–300(103J)
Dial Line Rate. This configuration option determines the modem’s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial
lines. Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs. Dial Line Rate sets the upper limit rate and
modulation; lower speed connections may still be possible.
What Dial Line Rate configuration options are displayed depends the setting of Modulation.
28800(V34), 33600, 31200, 26400(V34), 24000(V34), 21600(V34), 19200(V34), 16800(V34), 14400(V34), 12000(V34),
9600(V34), 7200(V34), 4800(V34) – The modem operates using V.34 modulation at the data rate selected. The modem
can be forced by the remote modem to a lower data rate. Note that if Automode is enabled and Dial Line Rate is set to
V.34, the modem can connect in a non-V.34 modulation. However, if Dial Line Rate is not set to V.34, it cannot be
Automoded to V.34. The 33,600 and 31,200 bps rates are Paradyne extensions of the CCITT V.34 recommendation.
19200(V32t), 16800(V32t), 14400(V32b), 12000(V32b), 9600(V32b), 7200(V32b), 4800(V32b) – The modem operates
using V.32terbo, V.32bis, or V.32 modulation at the data rate selected. The modem can be forced by the remote modem
to a lower data rate.
2400(V22bis), 1200(V22), 1200(212A) – Modem operates using the modulation and data rate selected.
0–300(V21), 0–300(103J) – Modem operates in full-duplex, Asynchronous mode. These data rates do not support V.42
or MNPr error control.
The factory default is 28800(V34).
AT command equivalent is S-register S41=n.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-23
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-4
(2 of 4)
Dial Line Configuration Options
Automode: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable System 85
Automode. Allows the modem to automatically detect the remote modem’s modulation.
Enable – The modem automatically adapts to the modulation scheme and line rate of the remote modem, and the VF
line condition. However, the maximum data rate the modem uses is determined by the Dial Line Rate configuration
option. Bell 103J protocol is used for data rates of 0–300 bps.
Disable – Connection fails if the remote modem does not support the selected modulation.
System 85 – Modifies parameters used by the connection process. Specify System 85 only if your modem is in a
modem pool attached to a System 85 Private Branch Exchange (PBX).
The factory default is Enable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S78 = n.
Autorate: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable StartAt48 StartAt96
Autorate. Controls the modem’s ability to adjust its speed upward and downward to accommodate the conditions of the
VF line.
Enable – Once connected, the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired. When line
conditions improve, the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support, limited by the value
of the Dial Line Rate configuration option. This autorating only occurs between 4800 bps and 19,200 bps during V.32bis
and V.32terbo connections and between 2400 bps and 33,600 bps during V.34 connections.
Disable – Line rate does not vary after the initial line rate selection during startup.
StartAt48, StartAt96 – Useful for lines with known noise problems, these settings cause the modem to connect at
4800 bps (StartAt48) or 9600 bps (StartAt96). If line conditions warrant it, the modem shifts up to the next higher rate
until the value of Dial Line Rate or the highest possible rate for the line is reached.
The factory default is Enable.
AT command for Autorate is S-register S76=n.
8-24
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-4
(3 of 4)
Dial Line Configuration Options
Dial TX Level: Permissv(– 9)
Nxt Permissv(– 9) –10 dBm –11 dBm –12 dBm –13 dBm –14 dBm –15 dBm –16 dBm –17 dBm
–18 dBm –19 dBm –20 dBm –21 dBm –22 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –25 dBm –26 dBm –27 dBm
–28 dBm –29 dBm –30 dBm –31 dBm –32 dBm ETC 1.0_Cell ETC 1.1_Cell
Dial Transmit Level. Sets the power output level of the transmit signal over dial lines.
Permissive (– 9 dBm) – The modem transmits data at approximately –9 dBm. This is true whether the modem is
connected to an RJ11-type permissive jack or to an RJ41 or RJ45 programmable jack.
ETC 1.0_Cell – Transmit level is automatically adjusted in response to line conditions according to the proprietary
Enhanced Throughput Cellular (ETCt) 1.0 specification. Use only with remote modems set to ETC 1.0_Cell, and limit
the data rate to 4800 bps.
ETC 1.1_Cell – Transmit level is automatically adjusted in response to line conditions according to the proprietary
Enhanced Throughput Cellular 1.1 specification.
The factory default is Permissv(– 9).
AT command equivalent s are &In and &Jn.
V22b Guard Tone: Disable
Nxt Disable 550Hz 1800Hz
V.22bis Guard Tone. Determines whether the V.22bis guard tone is disabled, set to 550 Hz, or set to 1800 Hz.
Disable – No guard tone.
550 Hz or 1800 Hz – When the modem is in Answer mode, it transmits the guard tone at this frequency.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is &Gn.
Train Time: Long
Nxt Long Short
Train Time. Controls V.34, V.32terbo, V.32bis, and V.32 train. Determines whether minimum or maximum time durations
are used during the handshaking sequence for both dial and leased line applications.
NOTE: This configuration option only appears when the Dial Line Rate configuration option is set for V.34, V.32terbo,
V.32bis, or V.32.
Long – Selects long train. Use this setting whenever far-end frequency offset (phase roll) may be encountered. This is
usually only required when transmitting over satellite links.
Short – Allows the modem to train-up faster.
The factory default is Long.
AT command equivalent is S-register S43=n.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-25
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-4
(4 of 4)
Dial Line Configuration Options
Asymmetric Rate: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
Asymmetric Rate. Controls rate symmetry when running V.34 modulation. (This configuration option does not appear
unless V.34 modulation is selected.)
Enable – The modem operates in asymmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates can be different) when running
V.34 modulation. Asymmetric Rate must be enabled in both modems.
Disable – The modem operates in symmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates are identical) when running
V.34 modulation. Either modem can force symmetric mode by disabling Asymmetric Rate.
The factory default is Enable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S14=n.
FallFwdDelay: Disable
End Disable 5_mins 15_mins 1_hour
Fall Forward Delay. Provides an initial delay before leased or dial lines are monitored for fall forward conditions. After the
timer expires, monitoring occurs as usual. Possible delay times are 5 minutes, 15 minutes, or 1 hour.
The factory default is Disable (no delay).
NOTE: Fall Forward Delay appears under both the Dial Line configuration options and the Leased Line configuration
options, but the same setting is used for both. Changing it in one place effectively changes it in the other.
There is no analogous AT command, so this configuration option is not available for modems without a shared or integral
DCP.
8-26
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Leased Line
The Leased Line configuration group only appears if
the modem is configured with the Sync Leased factory
preset template.
The Leased Line configuration options are used to
configure the modem for operation over leased lines.
Table 8-5 shows each Leased Line configuration option
as it appears on the LCD, with the Async Dial factory
default setting (the default value if the modem is just
being installed) shown following the colon (:) on the first
line and with all available selections listed on the second
line. Following this is a description of the configuration
option, a description of the available selections, and any
equivalent AT commands.
NOTE
The Leased Line configuration
group only appears if the
modem is configured with the
Sync Leased factory preset
template.
Table 8-5
(1 of 4)
Leased Line Configuration Options
*Leased Mode: 4WLL-Orig
Nxt 4WLL-Orig 4WLL-Ans
2WLL-Orig
2WLL-Ans
Leased Mode. Sets the modem for either 2-wire or 4-wire operation in Answer mode (receiving a call) or 2-wire or 4-wire
operation in Originate (initiating a call) mode.
NOTE: For proper operation over leased lines, one modem must be set for Originate mode, and the other modem must
be set for Answer mode.
For Sync Leased Answer Mode, 4-wire, Answer is the factory default.
For Sync Leased Originate Mode, 4-wire, Originate is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is &Ln.
*Modulation: V34
Nxt V34 V32bis/terbo V22bis V29/V33
Modulation determines the modem’s primary leased line modulation group: V.34; V.32bis and V.32terbo; V.22bis; or V.29
and V.33 (if installed).
The factory default is V34 (V.34 modulations).
* This configuration option is only available if the Sync Leased factory preset template is selected.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-27
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-5
(2 of 4)
Leased Line Configuration Options
*LeasedLine Rate: 28800(V34)
Nxt 28800(V34) 33600 31200 26400(V34) 24000(V34) 21600(V34) 19200(V34) 16800(V34) 14400(V34)
12000(V34) 9600(V34) 7200(V34) 4800(V34) 2400(V34)
- OR Nxt 19200(V32t) 16800(V32t) 14400(V32b) 12000(V32b) 9600(V32b) 7200(V32b) 4800(V32b)
- OR Nxt 2400(V22bis)
- OR Nxt 14400(V.33) 12000(V.33) 9600(V.29) 7200(V.29) 4800(V.29)
Leased-Line Rate. Determines the modem’s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on leased lines. In Async
mode, the DTE rate must equal the leased-line rate. Leased Line Rate sets the upper limit rate and modulation; lower
speed connections may still be possible.
What Leased Line Rate configuration options are displayed depends the setting of Modulation.
28800(V34), 33600, 31200, 26400(V34), 24000(V34), 21600(V34), 19200(V34), 16800(V34), 14400(V34), 12000(V34),
9600(V34), 7200(V34), 4800(V34), 2400(V34) – These modulation schemes are available on 2-wire or 4-wire leased
lines. The modem operates using V.34 modulation at the data rate selected. The modem can be forced by the remote
modem to a lower data rate. The 33,600 and 31,200 bps rates are Paradyne extensions of the CCITT V.34
recommendation.
19200(V.32t), 16800(V32t), 14400(V.32bis), 12000(V.32bis), 9600 (V.32bis), 7200(V.32bis), 4800(V.32bis) – These
modulation schemes are available on 2-wire or 4-wire leased lines. If a fixed V.32bis rate is selected, the modem can still
be commanded to fall back by a remote modem.
2400(V.22bis) – This modulation scheme is available on 2-wire and 4-wire leased lines.
14400(V.33), 12000(V.33) – These modulation schemes are available only on 4-wire leased lines, and only with modems
that have the optional V.33 Leased-Line feature installed.
9600(V.29), 7200(V.29), 4800(V.29) – These modulation schemes are available only on 4-wire leased lines, and only
with modems that have the optional V.29 Leased-Line feature installed.
NOTE: It is recommended that both modems use the same fixed data rate.
The factory default is 28800(V34).
AT command equivalent is S-register S44=n.
*Autorate: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
Autorate. The modems adapt to VF line condition and connect at the optimum rate during initial line establishment. Once
connected, the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired. When line conditions
improve, the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support. This autorating only occurs
between 4800 bps and 19,200 bps during V.32bis and V.32terbo connections and between 2400 bps and 33,600 bps
during V.34 connections.
The factory default is Enable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S82=n.
* This configuration option is only available if the Sync Leased factory preset template is selected.
8-28
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-5
(3 of 4)
Leased Line Configuration Options
*Leased TX Level: 0
Nxt 0 – 1 – 2 – 3
–4
–5
–6
–7
–8
–9
– 10 – 11
– 12 – 13
– 14
– 15
Leased Transmit Level. Selects the modem’s transmit power level over leased lines. The transmit output level can be
selected in 1 dBm decrements from 0 dBm to –15 dBm.
For V.34 operation over two-wire connections, do not set Leased TX Level to a value higher than –9 dBm.
The factory default is 0 dBm.
AT command equivalent is S-register S45=n.
*BadLn Auto Orig: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable FastBackup 2_min 5_min 10_min
Bad Lines Auto Originate. Allows the modem to dial backup telephone numbers (as determined by the Auto Redial
configuration option) to restore communications with the remote modem when the leased lines fail.
This configuration option must be enabled in both the local and remote modem. The Answer mode modem must have its
Auto-Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled. Refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group for
information regarding Auto-Answer.
Disable – The modem will not perform a Bad Lines Auto Originate.
Enable – The modem will originate a call after 30 seconds of continuous bad-line conditions.
FastBackup – The modem will originate a call after 20 seconds of continuous bad-line conditions.
2_min – The modem will originate a call after 2 minutes of continuous bad-line conditions.
5_min – The modem will originate a call after 5 minutes of continuous bad-line conditions.
10_min – The modem will originate a call after 10 minutes of continuous bad-line conditions.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S46=n.
*Rate Auto Orig: Disable
Nxt Disable OnFlBkTo48 OnFlBkTo72 OnFlBkTo96 OnFlBkTo120 OnFlBkTo144 OnFlBkTo168
Rate Auto Originate. Initiates a dial backup call, using the phone number in directory location 1, when the leased-line
rate of the modem falls back to or below a certain speed.
Disable – The modem will not perform a Rate Auto Originate.
OnFlBkTo48 – If the leased-line rate of the modem falls back to 4800 bps, a dial backup attempt will be initiated.
OnFlBkTo72 – If the leased-line rate of the modem falls back to 7200 bps, a dial backup attempt will be initiated.
OnFlBkTo96 – If the leased-line rate of the modem falls back to 9600 bps, a dial backup attempt will be initiated.
OnFlBkTo120 – If the leased-line rate of the modem falls back to 12000 bps, a dial backup attempt will be initiated.
OnFlBkTo144 – If the leased-line rate of the modem falls back to 14400 bps, a dial backup attempt will be initiated. This
is available only on modems with the V.32terbo feature.
OnFlBkTo168 – If the leased-line rate of the modem falls back to
16800 bps, a dial backup attempt will be initiated. This is available only on modems with the V.32terbo feature.
AT command equivalent is S36=n.
NOTE: Rate Auto-Originate is valid only when Autorate is enabled (S76=0) and when running V.32bis modulation.
* This configuration option is only available if the Sync Leased factory preset template is selected.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-29
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-5
(4 of 4)
Leased Line Configuration Options
*Auto Redial
Nxt Dir_1 Dirs_1-2 Dirs_1-3 Dirs_1-4 Dirs_1-5 Dirs_1-6 Dirs_1-7 Dirs_1-8 Dirs_1-9 Dirs_1-10
Auto Redial. Works in conjunction with the Bad Lines Auto Originate and Rate Auto Originate options. It allows repeated
automatic dial backup attempts by specifying the range of directory locations that can be tried. The modem must be in
Originate mode.
Dir_1 – The modem will use only directory location 1 for automatic dial backups.
Dirs_1-2 – The modem will use directory location 2 in the event of call failure using directory location 1.
Dirs_1-3 – The modem will use directory location 3 in the event of call failure using the preceding entries.
S
S
S
S
Dirs_1-10 – The modem will use directory location 10 in the event of call failure using the preceding entries.
AT command equivalent is S37=n.
*AutoDialStandby: Disable
Nxt Disable 15min 1hr 4hr Test(2min) Adv15min Adv30min Adv1hr AdvTest2min
Automatic Dial Standby. Permits a modem operating on dial lines (regardless of the method of dialing origination) to
check the quality of the leased lines periodically and, if they are good, to disconnect from the dial lines and resume
operations on the leased lines.
The time interval that the modem uses to check the quality of the leased lines is determined by the configuration option.
These intervals are 15 minutes, 1 hour, and 4 hours.
The normal settings cause an interruption of data flow on the dial line while the leased-line connection is checked. The
Advanced settings allow data flow to continue without interruption while the leased line is evaluated.
If Advanced settings are used, then both modems must be configured to the same Advanced setting.
The Test(2min) selections are for testing this feature only.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S47=n.
*CarrierOn Level: – 43dbm
End – 43dbm – 26dbm
Carrier On Level. This configuration option controls the carrier detection threshold for leased lines. When the power level
of the receive carrier signal drops 2 dBm below this level (either –26 dBm or – 43 dBm), LSD turns Off. When the carrier
signal is greater than this level, LSD turns ON.
The factory default is – 43dbm.
AT command equivalent is S-register S48=n.
*FallFwdDelay: Disable
End Disable 5_mins 15_mins 1_hour
Fall Forward Delay. Provides an initial delay before leased or dial lines are monitored for fall forward conditions. After the
timer expires, monitoring occurs as usual. Possible delay times are 5 minutes, 15 minutes, or 1 hour.
The factory default is Disable (no delay).
NOTE: Fall Forward Delay appears under both the Dial Line configuration options and the Leased Line configuration
options, but the same setting is used for both. Changing it in one place effectively changes it in the other.
There is no analogous AT command, so this option is not available for modems without a shared or integral DCP.
* This configuration option is only available if the Sync Leased factory preset template is selected.
8-30
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
V.42/MNP/Buffer
V.42/MNP/Buffer configuration options determine the
type of error correction and flow control used by the
modems and attached DTEs.
Some choices within this group may not appear
depending upon how previous configuration options have
been selected. If the Async/Sync Mode configuration
option is set for synchronous operation (see DTE Interface
configuration options group), then the V.42/MNP/Buffer
group does not appear on the LCD. Any changes made to
configuration options within this group only take effect
after a disconnect.
Table 8-6 shows each V.42/MNP/Buffer configuration
option as it appears on the LCD, with the Async Dial
factory default setting (the default value if the modem is
just being installed) shown following the colon (:) on the
first line and with all available selections listed on the
second line. Following this is a description of the
configuration option, a description of the available
selections, and any equivalent AT commands.
Table 8-6
(1 of 6)
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options
*Err Contrl Mode: V42/MNPorBfr
Nxt V42/MNPorBfr V42/MNPorDsc
LAPM_or_Disc LAPM_or_Buffr
MNP_or_Buffr
MNP_or_Disc BufferMode
DirectMode
Determines the type of error control used by the modem. In most cases, V42/MNPorBfr is the best choice. If V.42bis and
MNP are enabled, then the modem uses the following priority for error control negotiation: V.42, MNP 5 and below, and
Buffer Mode. Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs.
V.42/MNP or Buffer – Modem attempts to connect in V.42 Error Control mode. If this fails, the modem attempts to
connect in MNP mode. If this fails, the modem connects in Buffer mode and continues operation. This is also known as
V42/MNP Autoreliable Mode.
V.42/MNP or Disconnect – Modem attempts to connect in V.42 Error Control mode. If this fails, the modem attempts to
connect in MNP mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects. This is also known as Reliable mode.
MNP or Buffer – Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, the modem connects in Buffer mode. This is
also known as MNP Autoreliable Mode.
MNP or Disconnect – Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects. This is also
known as Reliable mode.
Buffer Mode – Modem does not use error control and allows the DTE rate to differ from the communications line rate.
This mode should only be used if the DTE provides its own error control or if errors in data can be tolerated. This setting
is also known as Normal mode and is valid even if the remote modem is set for Direct mode.
Direct Mode – Modem connects at a data rate equal to or less than the initial DTE interface rate. (The modem never
connects at a data rate greater than the initial DTE rate.) If the modem connects at a data rate lower than the DTE rate,
the DTE must then adjust its data rate to equal the modem rate. Ultimately, the modem speed and DTE speed must be
the same. Direct mode does not support error control or data buffering.
LAPM or Disconnect – Modem attempts to connect in V.42 Link Access Procedure for Modems (LAPM) error control
mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects. This setting should be used for cellular connections (at both the mobile and
PSTN sides) when it is known that both sides support V.42.
LAPM or Buffer – Modem attempts to connect in V.42 LAPM error control mode. If this fails, the modem connects in
Buffer mode and continues operation.
NOTE: The modem must be reconfigured for Direct mode before changing the leased-line modulation if V.42 error
control or Buffer mode are enabled with V.32bis on leased lines.
For Async Dial and UNIX Dial, V42/MNPorBfr is the factory default.
For Sync Dial and Sync Leased, DirectMode is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is \Nn.
* This configuration option is only available if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async. Refer to the DTE Interface
configuration options group for more on Async/Sync Mode.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-31
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-6
(2 of 6)
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options
*V42bis Compress: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
V.42bis Compression. Enables or disables V.42bis data compression.
Enable – Data compression operates in both the transmit and receive directions. This is the recommended setting for all
applications.
Disable – V.42bis data compression is disabled. This is rarely needed because V.42bis data compression does not
cause data expansion for compressed data.
The factory default is Enable.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set for V42/MNPorBfr or .
V42/MNPorDsc.
AT command equivalent is ″Hn.
*MNP5 Compress: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
MNP5 Compression. Determines if the modem uses MNP Class 5 data compression. It can be set independently of
V.42bis data compression. Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs.
The factory default is Enable.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set for V42/MNPorBfr,
V42/MNPorDsc, MNP or Buffr, or MNP or Disc.
AT command equivalent is %Cn.
*EC Negotiat Bfr: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable Disab&Switch
Error Control Negotiate Buffer. Determines if the answering modem buffers the data that it received from the remote
modem during an interval in which the modem attempts to establish a connection using error control. Online changes do
not take effect until a disconnect occurs.
Disable – Data is not buffered during the link negotiating (handshaking) sequence.
Enable – Data is buffered while the link is being established. Initialization data is not passed on the DTE during the
handshaking sequence.
Disable and Switch – Data is not buffered during the handshaking sequence. However, when the modem receives an
error control fallback character, it switches to Buffer mode. (See EC Fallback Char configuration option.)
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equiovalent is \Cn.
* This configuration option is only available if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async. Refer to the DTE Interface
configuration options group for more on Async/Sync Mode.
8-32
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-6
(3 of 6)
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options
*EC Fallbck Char: 013 ASCI
Nxt " 013 ASCI
Error Control Fallback Character. This configuration option allows you to enter the ASCII value of the error control
fallback character. This provides the remote modem with the ability to end the error control link negotiating
(handshaking) sequence by sending this character. The modems will connect in Buffer mode (no error control). Online
changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs.
When the modem receives this fallback character it switches to Buffer mode and transmits an EC fallback character to
the DTE. When comparing incoming characters for a match against the EC fallback character, the modem ignores parity.
The factory default is 13 ASCII.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if EC Negotiate Buffer is configured for Disab&Switch.
AT command equivalent is %An.
*Flw Cntl of DTE: CTS_to_DTE
Nxt CTS_to_DTE Disable XON/XOFF
Flow Control of DTE. Determines how the modem controls the flow of data from the DTE.
CTS to DTE – Method of flow control in which the modem raises and lowers its CTS interface lead to indicate when the
DTE should start and stop sending data.
Disable – The modem cannot control the flow of data from the DTE.
XON/XOFF – Method of flow control in which the modem sends XON and XOFF characters to the DTE to start and stop
the flow of data.
The factory default is CTS to DTE.
AT command equivalent is \Qn.
*Flw Cntl of Mdm: Disable
Nxt Disable XON/XOFF
RTS_to_Mdm
Flow Control of Modem. Determines how the DTE controls the flow of data from the modem.
Disable – The DTE cannot control the flow of data from the modem.
XON/XOFF – Method of flow control in which the modem starts and stops data flow based upon XON and XOFF
characters received from the DTE.
RTS to Modem – Method of flow control in which the modem respectively starts and stops data transmission based
upon the ON and Off state of the DTE’s RTS signal.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is \Qn.
* This configuration option is only available if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async. Refer to the DTE Interface
configuration options group for more on Async/Sync Mode.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-33
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-6
(4 of 6)
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options
*XON/XOFF Psthru: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
XON/XOFF Passthrough. Considers an XON/XOFF character as data and passes it on to the remote modem. In this
case, the DTE at one end of the communications link can send flow control characters to the other DTE. This is also
known as DTE to DTE flow control.
Disable – Flow control characters are processed but are not passed on to the remote modem.
Enable – Flow control characters are processed and passed on to the remote modem.
The factory default is Disable.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if the Flow Control configuration option is configured for XON/XOFF.
AT command equivalent is \Xn.
*Mdm/Mdm FlowCtl: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
Modem-to-Modem Flow Control. If a modem’s buffers begin to fill due to data it is receiving from the remote modem, but
is not passing on to the DTE, it can issue XON/XOFF flow control characters to the remote modem. This only applies if
Buffer (nonerror control) mode is selected. If Error Control mode is enabled, flow control between the modems will
happen automatically, regardless of the setting of this option.
Disable – Modem does not respond to XON and XOFF characters received over the VF line. Also, the modem will not
transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full.
Enable – Modem stops transmitting data to the remote modem if it receives an XOFF character over the VF line. An
XON character will enable data transmission. Also, the modem will transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its
receive buffers are full. Select this setting if the DTE rate is less than the VF line rate or if the DTE must frequently stop
the flow of data to process it.
The factory default is Disable.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if Flow Control is configured for XON/XOFF.
AT command equivalent is \Gn.
*Break Buffr Ctl: Keep-Data
Nxt Keep-Data Discard-Data
Break Buffer Control. Determines if data stored in the modem’s buffer is saved or discarded when the DTE issues a
break sequence.
Keep Data (Nondestructive mode) – Saves the data in the buffer in both the local and remote modems.
Discard Data (Destructive mode) – Empties the data buffer. Only buffers in the same direction of travel as the break
are discarded.
The factory default is Keep Data.
NOTE: This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option (see DTE Dialer
configuration options group) is enabled.
AT command equivalent is \Kn.
* This configuration option is only available if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async. Refer to the DTE Interface
configuration options group for more on Async/Sync Mode.
8-34
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-6
(5 of 6)
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options
*Send Break Cntl: Data-First
Nxt Data-First Break-First
Send Break Control. Determines what is sent from the modem first, data or break if a break sequence is sent from the
DTE.
Data First (Nonexpedited) – A break is treated as a data character and is sent in the order it was received. This is also
known as Nonexpedited mode.
Break First (Expedited) – A break is sent before the data currently in the buffer. This is also known as Expedited mode.
The factory default is Data First.
NOTE: This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option (see DTE Dialer
configuration options group) is enabled.
AT command equivalent is \Kn.
*TXBuffDiscDelay: 10sec
Nxt 10sec 60sec Disable
The Transmit Buffer Disconnect Delay is the maximum amount of time the modem can continue to send data in its
Transmit Buffer to the remote modem after it is commanded by the DTE to disconnect. Disable means that the
disconnect occurs immediately. The default is 10 seconds.
Disable – Modem disconnects immediately without attempting to send data stored in its buffers.
10, 60 sec – Maximum amount of time the modem tries to empty its buffers before disconnecting. In both cases (10 sec
and 60 sec), the modem disconnects much sooner if it can empty its buffers.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set for DirectMode.
AT command equivalent is S-register S49=n.
*RxBuffDiscDelay: Disable
Nxt 10sec 60sec Disable
Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay. Determines the maximum amount of time the modem can continue to send data in its
Receive Buffer to the DTE after the modem is commanded by the DTE to disconnect, or after the modem detects a line
disconnect. Through the DCP the available settings are Disable, 10sec, and 60sec; Disable means that the disconnect
occurs immediately. The default is Disable.
Disable – Modem disconnects immediately without attempting to send data stored in its buffers.
10, 60 sec – Maximum amount of time the modem tries to empty its buffers before disconnecting. In both cases (10 sec
and 60 sec), the modem disconnects much sooner if it can empty its buffers.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set for DirectMode.
AT command equivalent is S-register S39=n.
*Max Frame Size: 256
Nxt 256 192 128 64 32 16
For cellular applications, at least one of the modems should be set to 32.
AT command equivalent is \An.
* This configuration option is only available if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async. Refer to the DTE Interface
configuration options group for more on Async/Sync Mode.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-35
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-6
(6 of 6)
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options
*CellularEnhance: Disable
End Disable Enable
Enables or disables V.42 Cellular Enhancement mode.
Disable – The modem uses standard techniques for V.42 operation.
Enable – Cellular enhancements are enabled. The modem is still compatible with modems that do not have cellular
enhancements installed or enabled.
AT command equivalent is S91=n.
* This configuration option is only available if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async. Refer to the DTE Interface
configuration options group for more on Async/Sync Mode.
8-36
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Test
The Test configuration options determine specifics,
such as the duration of a test, for the various diagnostic
tests available to the modem.
Table 8-7 shows each Test configuration option as it
appears on the LCD, with the Async Dial factory default
setting (the default value if the modem is just being
installed) shown following the colon (:) on the first line
and with all available selections listed on the second line.
Following this is a description of the configuration option,
a description of the available selections, and any
equivalent AT commands.
Table 8-7
(1 of 2)
Test Configuration Options
DTE RL (CT140): Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
DTE Remote Loopback. Controls the use of Pin 21 of the RS-232D/CCITT V.24 interface by the DTE to initiate a remote
loopback. An Abort command or test time-out ends this test.
Enable – The DTE forces the modem into remote loopback when the signal on Pin 21 (CCITT 140) is turned ON.
Remote Loop ends when the signal is dropped.
Disable – The DTE does not initiate remote loopback in response to the signal on Pin 21.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S51=n.
DTE LL (CT141): Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
DTE Local Loopback. Controls the use of Pin 18 of the RS-232D/CCITT V.24 interface by the DTE to initiate a local
loopback. An Abort command or test time-out ends this test.
Enable – The DTE forces the modem into local loopback when the signal on Pin 18 (CCITT 141) is turned ON. Local
loopback ends when the signal is dropped.
Disable – The DTE will not initiate local loopback in response to the signal on Pin 18.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S52=n.
Test Timeout: Disable
Nxt Disable 30sec 60sec 240sec
Test Time-out. Determines how long a test runs before aborting.
Disable – Allows a test to run indefinitely.
30, 60, or 240 seconds – Allows the test to run for 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 240 seconds.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S-register S18=n.
Rcv Remote Loop: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
Receive Remote Loopback Response. Determines if the modem responds to a request for a remote loopback issued
from a remote modem.
The factory default is Enable.
AT command equivalent is &Tn.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-37
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-7
(2 of 2)
Test Configuration Options
V54 Address: Disable
Nxt Disable (Address Values)
V.54 Address. Determines which remote 3800Plus modem is placed into a remote loopback test. This can be either a
remote digital loopback or local analog loopback. This type of addressing can be used for extended data circuits (tail
circuits).
Disable – This is used for normal point-to-point dial and leased-line networks.
Address Values – 01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 0B, 0D, 0F, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 1B, 1D, 1F, 25, 27, 2B, 2D, 2F, 33, 35, 37, 3B, 3D,
3F, 55, 57, 5B, 5F, 6F, 77, or 7F. This configuration option selects the address of a modem that is to be placed into a
loopback test. This configuration option is used for more complex networks where multiple modems, used in extended
data circuits (tail circuits), can be commanded to loopback.
CAUTION: Selecting an address will disable any remote loopback that can be commanded from a remote modem. The
DTE must now control loopback via CT140 and supply the address.
The factory default is Disable.
AT command equivalent is S53=n.
V54 Device Type: Peripheral
End Peripheral Intermediate
V.54 Device Type. Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network.
Peripheral – The modem is located at the endpoint of the network and is not connected back-to-back with another
modem.
Intermediate – The modem is either of the two modems connected back-to-back.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if V54 Address is enabled.
The factory default is Peripheral.
AT command equivalent is S54=n.
8-38
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Misc
The Miscellaneous configuration options determine
specifics for various functions, including network
management parameters and remote modem access.
Table 8-8 shows each Misc (Miscellaneous)
configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the
Async Dial factory default setting (the default value if the
modem is just being installed) shown following the
colon (:) on the first line and with all available selections
listed on the second line. Following this is a description of
the configuration option, a description of the available
selections, and any equivalent AT commands.
Table 8-8
(1 of 3)
Miscellaneous Configuration Options
StrapsWhenDisc: No_Change
Nxt No_Change Reload RelodNoATChg
Straps When Disconnected. Determines whether or not configuration options in the Active (Saved) configuration area
are reloaded to Active (Operating) when a disconnect occurs. This is useful in modem pooling applications.
No Change – Configuration options do not change upon disconnect.
Reload – The Active (Operating) configuration area, which controls modem operation, is reloaded from the Active
(Saved) configuration area when a disconnect occurs. This is useful in modem pooling applications where it is desirable
to start the modem from a known condition after every call. This allows multiple users to issue AT commands to change
the modem’s operation for their particular call.
Reload, No AT Change – This has the same effect as Reload, except that it becomes impossible to change this
configuration option with an AT command, and the command buffer is cleared so that /A (Repeat Last Command) has no
effect.
NOTE: If Reload or RelodNoATChg is selected, the following AT commands are disabled although the OK result code
appears when these commands are issued:
AT&F0. Loads Async Dial into Active(Operating)
AT&F1. Loads Sync Dial into Active (Operating)
AT&F2. Loads Sync Leased (Answer) into Active (Operating)
AT&F3. Loads UNIX Dial into Active(Operating)
AT&F4. Loads Sync Leased (Originate) into Active (Operating)
AT&F5. Loads Cellular(Mobile) into Active (Operating)
AT&F6. Loads Cellular (PSTN) into Active (Operating)
AT&W0. Write Active(Operating) to Active(Saved)
AT&W1. Write Active(Operating) to Customer 1
AT&W2. Write Active(Operating) to Customer 2
AT&Zn=x. Store directory numbers
Factory default templates do not affect the setting of StrapsWhenDisc.
AT command equivalent is S88=n.
Speaker Control: OnUntilCarr
Nxt OnUntilCarr Off On
Speaker Control. Determines if the speaker is Off, On until carrier signal is received by the modem, or On all the time.
The factory default is OnUntilCarr.
NOTE: Speaker Control can also be temporarily set using the Control branch; however, a reset or power cycle will
restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings.
AT command equivalent is Mn.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-39
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 8-8
(2 of 3)
Miscellaneous Configuration Options
Speaker Volume: Medium
Nxt Medium Low High
Speaker Volume. Controls the level of speaker volume.
The factory default is Medium.
NOTE: Speaker Volume can also be temporarily set using the Control branch; however, a reset or power cycle will
restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings.
AT command equivalent is Ln.
Access frm Remt: Enable
Nxt Enable Disable
Access from Remote. Determines if your modem’s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem via the VF line.
If this configuration option is disabled, the modem cannot be accessed by another modem, and the Clone to Remote
feature is not available.
Enable – Allows access from a remote modem.
Disable – Does not allow access from a remote modem.
The factory default templates do not affect Access from Remote.
NOTE: The remote modem must be a 3800Plus modem.
AT command equivalent is S-register S55=n.
RemAccssPasswrd: 00000000
Nxt " 00000000
Remote Access Password. Allows the entry of a password for establishing control of a remote modem from the DCP of a
local modem. The same password must be used in both the local and remote modem.
NOTE: If the Access from Remote configuration option is set to Disable, the password has no effect.
AT command equivalent is S-registers S56, S57, S58, and S59=n.
Dir#1_Callback: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
Directory location 1 Callback. This configuration option controls whether or not the modem’s single number callback
function is used.
Disable – Modem does not use the single number callback function.
Enable – Modem answers a call, disconnects, and dials the number stored in directory location 1.
NOTE: This function is disabled if dial access security is enabled.
The factory default is Disable.
AT Command equivalent is S67=n.
NetMngmtAddress: 256
Nxt " 256
Network Management Address. Determines the address used when accessing a locally attached modem from the
6700 Series NMS. This configuration option is ignored by remote modems.
Address values range from 001 to 256.
The factory default templates do not affect Network Management Address.
AT command equivalent is S-register S75=n.
8-40
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-8
(3 of 3)
Miscellaneous Configuration Options
NMS_Call_Msgs: CallCnct&Prg
Nxt CallCnct&Prg Disable CallCnctOnly
CallProgOnly
NMS Call Messages. Determines if modem status and/or call summary information is sent to the 6700 Series NMS. The
modem can itemize status, such as CallProgress messages, or it can report a summary of activity, such as Call Connect
messages, to the NMS.
Call Connect & Progress – Enables both Call Connect and Call Progress information to be reported to the NMS.
Disable – Modem status and call summary information is not sent to the NMS.
Call Connect Only – The modem accumulates call statistics over a period of time and then reports these statistics to
the NMS. The NMS uses this data to produce utilization reports.
Call Progress Only – The modem reports detailed modem status information to the NMS. These messages include any
events that can display on the LCD.
The factory default templates do not affect NMS Call Messages.
AT command equivalent is S66=n.
NMS DTR Alarm: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
NMS DTR Alarm. Determines whether an NMS DTE alarm report is generated when DTR is off.
Disable – The state of DTR does not cause an alarm condition to be reported.
Enable – A DTE alarm condition is reported to the NMS controller in the Device Health & Status message if DTR is off
for more than 10 seconds. The alarm condition is reported as inactive after DTR is on for 3 seconds.
The factory default templates do not affect NMS DTR Alarm.
AT command equivalent is S77=n.
NetworkPosition: Tributary
Nxt Tributary Control
Network Position Identification. Each modem must be identified either as a control modem or a tributary modem.
NOTE: This configuration option is only applicable for leased-line network management applications.
For the 3810Plus and 3820Plus, Tributary is the factory default.
For the 3811Plus, Control is the factory default.
AT command equivalent is S74=n.
CellulrRJ11Adpt:: Disable
End Disable Enable
Cellular RJ11 Adapt. Allows the modem to support an RJ11 connection to a 3-watt phone. It also causes the modem to
transmit the ETC 1.1 Calling Tone during call origination.
Disable – No RJ11 support or ETC 1.1 Calling Tone.
Enable – For use when the Cellular(Mobile) factory template is loaded, enables RJ11 support and ETC 1.1 Calling Tone.
AT command equivalent is S93=n.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-41
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Security Configuration
Options
The Security Configuration Options group allows you
to view and set dial access security parameters. This
group appears only if the dial access security feature has
been installed.
Table 8-9 shows each Security configuration option as
it appears on the LCD. The factory default value is shown
after the colon (:) on the first line; all available selections
are listed on the second line. After this, a description of
the each selection follows. These configuration options do
not have an equivalent AT command.
Table 8-9
(1 of 2)
Security Configuration Options
*EntryWait_Time: 20 sec
Nxt 20 sec 10 sec 40 sec
60 sec
Entry Wait Timeout. Determines how long the answering modem waits for the originating modem to enter a VF-side
password and DTE-side password.
This timer resets for each phase of access security. For example, if a VF-side password and a DTE-side password
are required, then the user has 20 seconds per entry to input the correct password.
The factory default is 20 seconds.
VF_Prompt_Type: 2nd_DialTone
Nxt 2nd_DialTone Quiet_Answer
VF Prompt Type. Determines how the answering modem requests a valid password from the originating modem for
the valid password. This configuration option is only used for VF-side password entry and is not valid for DTE-side
password entry.
NOTE: This configuration option only appears if the Answer Security Mode configuration option is configured for
VF_&_DTE.
2nd Dial Tone – Once the answering modem is off-hook, it generates a dial tone to the originating modem as a
prompt for that modem’s VF-side password. (Wait for Second Dial Tone is represented by a W in the dial command
string.)
Quiet Answer – Once the answering modem is off-hook, it does not send an answer tone to the originating modem.
The originating modem enters its VF-side password after detecting a ring back signal followed by five seconds of
silence. For this to work correctly, the Auto Answer Ring # configuration option in the answering modem must be set
to 2 rings or greater. (Wait for Quiet Answer is represented by an @ in the dial command string.)
The factory default is 2nd_DialTone.
*#DTE_PW_Tries: 1
Nxt 1 2 3 4 5
Number of DTE Password Tries. Determines the number of attempts an originating user has to enter a valid
DTE-side password. If the password entered does not match a value in the answering modem’s Password Table,
then the modem will issue the password prompt again (provided that the number of tries is set to a value greater
than 1). This will continue until the correct password is entered by the originating user or the number of tries allowed
is met.
The factory default is 1.
*DTE_PW_TermChar: 013
Nxt " 013
DTE Password Termination Character. Allows you to change the ASCII character used to indicate the end of a
password or User ID entered by an originating user. This character can be set to any ASCII value from 0 to 127.
The factory default is 13 (ASCII carriage return).
* This configuration option does not appear if the Answer Security Mode configuration option is configured for No
Answer Security.
8-42
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Configure Branch
Table 8-9
(2 of 2)
Security Configuration Options
*DTE_PW_BkSpChar: 008
Nxt " 008
DTE Password Backspace Character. Sets the character that is used to perform a backspace in security mode. This
character can be set to any ASCII value from 0 to 127.
The factory default is 08 (ASCII backspace).
Get_User_ID: Disable
Nxt Disable Enable
Get User ID. Determines whether the remote user is prompted for an NMS-defined logon ID once the modems have
completed initial handshaking. For consistent operation from the remote user’s viewpoint, all modems in a modem
group must use the same setting.
Disable – The user is prompted only for a password (if required by the setting of Answer Security Mode or the
configuration of the VF-side password).
Enable – The user is prompted for a login ID and then a password (if required by the setting of Answer Security
Mode or the configuration of the VF-side password). NMS sends a disconnect command to the local modem if the
login ID is invalid.
The factory default is Disable.
NMS_Reporting: 00
Nxt " 00
NMS Reporting. Determines whether and how dial access security events are reported to the NMS controller. The
possible values, 00–15, represent a bit map. The bits are normally set using the NMS controller.
The value of NMS_Reporting is not affected by loading a factory default template. The initial value when the modem
is shipped is 00.
Answer_Secur: No_Answ_Sec
Nxt No_Answ_Sec DTE_Only
VF_&_DTE VF_w/_DTE
Answer Access Security Mode. This configuration option is read-only and cannot be changed from the Configure
branch. The setting of this configuration option can only be changed in the Set Answer Sec group found in the
Security branch.
The settings of this configuration option determine the type of access security protection provided by the modem. It
can be disabled using the No_Answ_Sec setting, or it can be enabled with the DTE_Only, VF_&_DTE, or
VF_w/_DTE settings.
Originate_Secur: No_OrigSec
Nxt No_OrigSec Ena_Orig_Sec
Originate Security Mode. This configuration option is read-only and cannot be changed from the Configure branch.
The setting of this configuration option can only be changed in the Set Orig Sec group found in the Security branch.
This configuration option enables or disables security protection used for outbound calls when using the
AT command autodialer function.
* This configuration option does not appear if the Answer Security Mode configuration option is configured for No
Answer Security.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
8-43
Control Branch
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy/Remove Make Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Line/Disconnect Service Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Firmware Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
9-1
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-6
9-6
Overview
Control Branch
The Control branch of the Top-Level menu allows you
to manage hardware and software functions, such as
speaker volume, reset, busy out, and firmware download.
The 3811Plus modem has the additional hardware
function, Service Line.
To access Control from the Top-Level menu, make the
following selections:
Idle : 28.8
Control
F1
Press the
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
<
Remote
F2
F3
key until Control appears. Select Control.
9-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Speaker
Reset
Speaker allows you to make temporary adjustments to
the modem’s speaker volume. Upon a reset, speaker
volume returns to its configured setting. For more
information on speaker settings, refer to the Misc section
in Chapter 7.
Reset causes the modem to stop operation and perform
a complete program restart. The modem begins the
power-up test sequence that ends with the Top-Level
menu displayed on the LCD. Configuration options stored
in an Active (Saved) configuration area are copied to the
Active (Operating) configuration area.
To access Speaker from the Control branch, make the
following selections:
Control :
Speaker
F1
To access Reset from the Control branch, make the
following selection:
>
Reset
F2
Control :
Speaker
>
Reset
F3
F1
F2
F3
F2
F3
Select Speaker.
Select Reset.
Speaker Control :
>
Off
Low
Med
F1
F2
Reset
F3
F1
Press the
key and appropriate function keys to
choose the desired selection.
Reset appears before the modem performs the
power-up diagnostic test sequence.
DCP selections are
Off
Turns the speaker off.
Low
Adjusts speaker to low volume.
Med
Adjusts speaker to medium volume.
High
Adjusts speaker to high volume.
AT Command Equivalent
The AT command for Reset is Z9.
Command Complete appears on the LCD.
To exit Speaker and remain in the Control branch,
press the
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level
menu, press the
key.
AT Command Equivalent
The AT commands for ON/Off are M0, M1, and M2.
The AT commands for volume control are L0, L1, L2,
and L3.
9-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Control Branch
Make Busy/Remove Make Busy
AT Command Equivalent
The Make Busy function forces the modem off-hook so
it cannot answer a call. This is often used with PBX
systems to permit the busy out of a PBX port for rotary or
hunt groups.
The AT command for Remove Make Busy is H or H0.
The AT command for Make Busy is H1.
Service Line/Disconnect Service Line
The Service Line function allows you to switch a
specific 3811Plus modem installed in a COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier from normal dial or leased-line
operation to service-line operation. This switch only
places the modem on the service line. For a connection to
be established, you must still use the normal dialing
methods as described in Chapter 5, Call Setup Branch.
WARNING
To not violate FCC and DOC
regulations, this function
must only be used behind a
user’s PBX.
To access Make Busy from the Control branch, make
the following selections:
Control :
Reset Make_Busy
F1
Press the
Make Busy.
F2
F3
key until Make Busy appears. Select
A service line is an extra dial line connected to a
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. This line is normally
shared by up to eight 3811Plus modems installed in either
Slots 1–8 or Slots 9–16. However, by daisy chaining the
service-line connector of one Network Interface Module
(NIM) to the service line of another NIM installed in the
same carrier, you can permit all 16 modems to share one
service line. The service line can also be extended to other
carriers in a cabinet. For more information regarding daisy
chaining of modems to the service line, refer to the
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual.
To enable service line from the Control branch, make
the following selections:
Make Busy
Command Complete
F1
F2
Control :
Service_Line
F3
F1
The modem is now in a forced busy condition.
Command Complete appears on the LCD.
To remove the modem from Make Busy mode, press
the
key once and the
key until Remove Make
Busy appears.
F2
F3
Press the
key until Service Line appears. Select
Service Line to switch the modem from its normal dial
line to the service line. Now, when the modem places a
call, instead of using the dial or leased line, the call is
placed on the service line.
To disconnect the modem from the service line and
key once and the
resume normal operation, press the
key until Disc Serv Line appears.
Control :
RemoveMakeBusy
F1
F2
Select Disc Serv Line. The call and service line
disconnect and the message Command Complete
appears on the LCD.
F3
Press any function key to select RemoveMakeBusy.
The message Command Complete appears on the LCD.
AT Command Equivalent
There is no AT Command Equivalent for Service Line.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
9-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Download Code
To access Download Code from the Control branch,
make the following selections:
The Download Code function sets parameters within
the modem when transferring firmware to a remote
modem or when receiving firmware upgrades from a
locally attached PC-based controller. The latter should
only be performed by customer service personnel.
There are two selections under Download Code: Clone
to Remote and To Local via DTE. Clone to Remote is
used to transfer an exact copy of the firmware currently
stored in a 3800Plus modem to another 3800Plus modem.
For this to occur, the modem must be connected to the
remote modem via a leased-line network or an established
dial-line network. If these prerequisites do not exist, then
this selection does not appear on the LCD.
The second selection appearing on the LCD is To
Local via DTE. This function permits firmware upgrades
to be transferred to a 3800Plus modem. This type of
download requires a locally attached PC-controller to be
connected to the modem’s DTE port as well as special
download software. Any downloads using this selection
are intended to be performed by customer service
personnel only.
Control :
Download_Code
F1
F3
Press the
key until Download Code appears. Press
any function key to select Download Code.
Download Code
Clone_Remote
F1
F2
>
F3
Press any function key to select Clone to Remote.
Warning : Download
Abort_Download
Clone To Remote
F1
This function allows you to transfer an exact copy of
the local modem’s firmware to a remote modem. Before
using Clone to Remote, perform the following:
• Make sure the modems have an established dial
network connection using V.34, V.32terbo, V.32bis,
or V.32 modulation or a leased-line connection
using either V.34, V.32terbo, V.32bis, or
V.32 modulation.
F2
F3
At this point, if you do not want to continue this
process, abort the transfer by selecting any function key.
This returns the modem to the Top-Level menu.
However, to continue with the transfer, press the
key to display the Reprogram Remote selection.
• Make sure the remote modem’s Access From
Remote configuration option is enabled.
• Make sure the password (Remote Access Password
configuration option) is the same in both the local
and remote modems. (For an example of how to
change the password, refer to the Editing and
Saving a Configuration Option section in
Chapter 8, Configure Branch.)
9-4
F2
November 1996
Warning : Download
Reprogram_Remote
F1
F2
F3
3980-A2-GB30-20
Control Branch
If unsuccessful, the modem remains in the Download
Transfer mode. The LCD’s top line displays RemClone
Failed and the bottom line displays one of the following
messages:
WARNING
Pressing any function key
now begins the transfer to the
remote modem. This process
takes the communications
link out of service for
several minutes depending
upon the data rate of the link
(28,800 bps = 5 minutes;
14,400 bps = 10 minutes;
9600 bps = 15 minutes;
4800 bps = 30 minutes). If the
Clone to Remote process is
started and then interrupted,
the remote modem is left in a
partially programmed state in
which its functional
capabilities are limited to
those required to initiate and
complete another download
attempt. If you cannot
complete a download, call
your service representative.
Incompat Modulat
The modems are connected,
but are using a modulation
scheme other than V.34, V.33,
V.32bis, V.32, or V.29.
No Response
The remote modem is not a
3800Plus modem or the
connection between the two
modems is poor.
Access Disabled
The remote modem’s Access
from Remote configuration is
disabled.
Password Invalid
The local and remote
modems’ passwords do not
match.
Correct the problem and attempt another download
from the local modem. If this fails, contact your service
representative.
After successful establishment of a Remote Cloning
Download session, the following screens are displayed.
Press any function key (F1, F2, or F3) to begin the
transfer.
RemClone Status
Initializing
RemClone Status
Establish Remote
F1
F2
F1
F3
The local modem’s LCD displays Establish Remote,
indicating the modem is attempting to establish a Remote
Cloning Download session with the remote modem.
November 1996
F3
RemClone Status
Bank 1 : xxxx/yyyy
F1
3980-A2-GB30-20
F2
F2
F3
9-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
As data banks are transferred, the local and remote
LCD’s bottom line displays the status of the download
process, and the number of records sent versus the total
number of records for that bank.
However, a DTE is not required. The download begins
without any operator action. When the download begins,
the DCP displays download status messages with the data
bank number, current block being loaded, and the total
number of blocks. There are two data banks.
RemClone OK
Call_Setup
F1
F2
Download Status
Bank 1:0088/0092
F3
F1
F2
F3
If the download is successful, the local modem
displays Remote Clone OK and the remote modem
displays Frmware Upgrade. If the download took place
over the dial network, the modems disconnect when the
download is complete.
If the modem connects at 14,400 bps, the download
takes about 10 minutes. When the download is complete,
the modem resets itself and displays a normal status
message (such as Idle:28.8).
If unsuccessful, RemClone Failed is displayed on the
LCD’s top line. Attempt another download from the local
modem. If this fails, contact your service representative.
Reload your configuration options from the
Customer 1 or Customer 2 memory area that you saved
them to.
To Local via DTE
Download Failure
This function is for use only by customer service
personnel to transfer new firmware to 3800Plus modems.
If the download is interrupted, the modem is left in a
state in which it can only be used to make or receive a call
for a download.
Automatic Firmware
Download
DownldOnly Mode>
Call_Setup
New releases may be available for the 3800Plus
modem. The latest 3800Plus firmware is available at no
charge from the Automatic Firmware Download Center.
Refer to page A in the front of this document for contact
information.
To download the firmware, your modem must be
configured for dialing. Save your modem’s current
configuration to the Customer 1 or Customer 2 memory
area, and load the Async Dial factory template. (See
Chapter 8, Configure Branch, for information about
saving and changing configuration options.)
F1
F2
F3
If an interruption occurs and your modem is left in this
state, repeat the download process by directing the modem
to dial the Automatic Firmware Download Center. (See
Chapter 5, Call Setup Branch, for information about
dialing a number using the DCP.) If you are unable to
complete the download, call your service representative
for assistance.
If you have a DTE (a terminal or PC) attached to your
modem, informational messages are displayed on it when
the modem is connected. These show the amount of time
the download will take.
9-6
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Remote Branch
10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Remote Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Overview
Remote Branch
The Remote branch of the Top-Level menu allows you
to control the remote modem’s DCP using the local
modem’s DCP. This allows you to change configuration
options and control test functions in a remote modem.
Remote DCP access is only available when using V.34,
V.32terbo, V.32bis, or V.32 modulation schemes.
The following conditions must be met before using the
Remote branch:
• A connection using either the dial network or leased
lines must be established.
• The Access from Remote configuration option must
be enabled in the remote modem.
• The Remote Access Password configuration option
must be the same for both the local and remote
modems.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
10-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Remote DCP access is accomplished using either the
primary or secondary channel (if available) of the VF line.
Using the primary channel gives a much faster response
time due to the higher data rate, but it also interrupts data
flow because primary data is stopped when Remote mode
is active. Once Remote mode is terminated, the primary
channel is automatically made available to data
transmission.
Select Channel
Secondary
F1
F2
>
F3
or
Unlike primary channel communications, the
secondary channel operates at a slower data rate and does
not interrupt data flow. (V.34, V.32terbo, V.32bis, and
V.32 are the only modulations available on the secondary
channel.)
Select Channel
Prim (data blckd)
F1
F2
<
F3
To access the Remote branch, make the following
selections:
Online : 28.8
<
Control
Remote
F1
Press the
Remote.
F2
F3
If operation over the secondary channel is desired,
press any function key to select the secondary channel.
Secondary channel only appears if using V.34,
V.32terbo, V.32bis, or V.32 modulation. If operation
over the primary channel is desired, press the
key
until Prim appears, and press any function key.
key until Remote appears. Select
Online : 28.8
Control
ExitRem
F1
F2
F3
NOTE
If a connection is not established
between a local 3800Plus
modem and a remote 3800Plus
modem, the LCD displays
Remote Mode Fail – No
Circuit. Press the
key to
return to the Top Level menu,
and dial again.
10-2
If the remote modem accepts the password and the
entry is successful, the Top-Level menu of the remote
modem appears on the local modem’s LCD. An appears
in the upper right-hand corner indicating that what is
displayed on your LCD is actually the Top-Level menu of
the remote 3800Plus modem.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Remote Branch
The Top-Level menu of the remote 3800Plus modem is
similar to the local 3800Plus modem with the following
exceptions:
• Change Directory is the only function available
under the Call Setup branch.
• Self and Local Analog Loop do not appear under
the Test branch when using the secondary channel.
When using the primary channel, the Test branch
does not appear.
• In the Control branch, Make Busy is not available.
• The Security Branch is not available.
• Exit Remote replaces Remote on the local modem’s
LCD.
To return to local modem operation, select ExitRem.
Any changes made to configuration options while using
the Remote branch are not saved until you exit the
Remote branch.
3980-A2-GB30-20
The following conditions can cause Remote branch
access to fail:
• The local modem is not able to communicate
with the remote modem because of a poor dial
network or leased-line connection, or the remote
modem is not a COMSPHERE (3800, 3900, or
3800Plus series) modem. If this is the case, the
status message No Response appears on the LCD.
• If a connection is established but the remote
modem’s Access from Remote configuration option
is disabled, then the status message Access
Disabled appears on the LCD.
• If a connection is established but the wrong
password is stored, the status message Password
Invalid appears on the LCD. This configuration
option must be enabled by the remote user. (See
Remote Access Password configuration option in
Chapter 8, Configure Branch.)
November 1996
10-3
Security
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Originate Access Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answer Access Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Access Ctrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Password Entry Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answer Access Password (VF-Side and DTE-Side Entry Techniques) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Originate Access Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Table Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview
11-1
11-2
11-2
11-4
11-4
11-10
11-11
11-11
11-12
11-12
Dial Access Security is an optional feature that allows
you to control who has access to your 3800Plus modem
and ultimately your host DTE.
NOTE
This chapter supports the
operation of dial access security
for COMSPHERE 3800Plus
modems. This chapter is
self-supporting and can be
removed to prevent unwanted
knowledge of dial access
security operation.
Although the security functions
described in this chapter are
designed to prevent unwanted
user access to your network, the
company recognizes that no
security system is infallible.
3980-A2-GB30-20
11
To take advantage of this security feature, you must
create a database of passwords which are stored in the
modem’s nonvolatile memory. The 3800Plus modems can
store a maximum of 20 passwords. (A 3811Plus with the
optional Password Expansion Feature can store up to
3000 passwords.) Each password is assigned a series of
parameters that determine the type of security protocol
applied to it. This protocol is established in the Security
branch of the Top-Level menu. Control of security
functions is established in the Security Configuration
Options group which is located in the Configure branch of
the Top-Level menu. These areas are described in the
Security Branch section of this chapter and the Security
Configuration Options section of Chapter 8.
The 3800Plus modem uses an outbound and inbound
method of security known respectively as Originate
Access and Answer Access security. Both methods of
security require some type of password entry whether it be
included as part of an AT command dial string or entered
directly from a remote user’s DTE.
November 1996
11-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Originate Access Security
VF-Side Passwords
Originate Access lets you control who can originate a
call from a local modem via the AT command set. This is
useful in LAN and modem pooling applications. With
Originate Access security, a local user’s password is
embedded in the AT dial command. If the password is
valid, the user can dial out using this modem.
VF-side password entry occurs between modems prior
to connecting. Once the VF-side password is entered, no
other user intervention is required since security
negotiation is handled solely by the modems. When the
answering modem is configured for VF entry technique, it
goes off-hook and transmits to the originating modem
either a secondary dial tone or silence (this choice
depends on how the VF Prompt Type option is
configured). The originating modem detects this response
and transmits its password which corresponds to a
preselected series of DTMF tones. Note that VF
passwords can be from 1 to 8 digits in length; only
decimal digits are permitted. The answering modem
verifies the password against its own password database,
and if valid, continues with the normal training sequence.
The following example illustrates the format for an
Originate Access password:
ATD%abc123%T9,8005551234 (press Enter)
Where:
ATD is the AT dial command string.
% (percent sign) is the start and stop
AT command string interrupt character.
The password must be embedded in
these characters.
abc123 is the 10-alphanumeric character
originate password.
T is the Tone (DTMF) dial modifier.
, (comma) is the pause dial modifier.
98005551234 is the phone number.
Originate Access Security is enabled or disabled by the
Set Originate Security group.
Answer Access Security
The other method of security, which is the primary
focus of this chapter, is Answer Access. Answer Access
allows the answering modem to restrict entry to the host
DTE by ensuring that originating (remote) modems and/or
users have been granted proper security access. Access
can be granted by using one of three techniques: VF-side
password entry, DTE-side password entry, or a
combination of both.
VF-side password works with any autodialer that
supports second dial tone or quiet answer and can be
implemented in one of three ways. First, the VF password
can be embedded within the AT command dial
string. Second, a phone number and password can be
entered via the diagnostic control panel (DCP). (This is
the preferred method for synchronous applications.) And
finally, an attached telephone can be used to manually
generate DTMF tones for the phone number and
password. After the answering modem accepts the
password and generates an answerback tone, the
originating caller places the modem in Data mode and
hangs up the phone.
The following examples illustrate two ways to enter a
VF-side password:
ATDP5551234TW12345678# (press Enter)
or
ATDT5551234@12345678# (press Enter)
Where:
ATD is the AT dial command.
P and T are the Pulse dial and Tone
(DTMF) dial modifiers.
5551234 is the phone number.
W or @ is the VF Prompt Tone option
setting for second dial tone or quiet
answer.
12345678 is the VF-side password.
# is the password termination character.
11-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Security
DTE-Side Passwords
NOTE
DTE-side password entry requires the originating user
to supply a valid password via his DTE. This method of
password entry occurs after the modems’ training
sequence, but before normal connection. The modems
must be configured for asynchronous operation to use this
type of security.
While pulse dial can be used to
originate the call, DTMF tones
must be used for the password.
This can be accomplished by
using the P and T modifiers
appropriately. Refer to the Dial
command in Chapter 13, AT
Command Set and S-Registers,
for more on modifiers.
This method of password entry requires that the
answering modem be a 3800Plus modem. The modem
must be configured for VF-side password entry and the
originating user must know the correct VF-side password.
The originating modem can be another 3800Plus modem
or any vendor’s modem.
Some originating modems may not recognize the
W modifier as a wait for second dial tone. If your call
disconnects due to a VF Password Timeout or an
Unknown VF Password, first verify that the answering
3800Plus modem’s VF Prompt Type is set for 2nd Dial
Tone. Next, verify that the Dial Tone Detect configuration
option in the originating modem is enabled. Third, insert
several Pause (,) modifiers into the dial string instead of
the W modifier. (For the 3800Plus modem, each Pause,
which is determined by the Pause Time configuration
option (S8), is equal to 2 seconds.) This allows a delay
between the processing of the phone number by the
answering modem and the transmission of the VF-side
password by the originating modem.
Some experimentation may be necessary to determine
the number of pauses necessary for your call.
3980-A2-GB30-20
When using DTE-side password entry, the modems go
through their normal training and error control
negotiation. Once complete, the answering modem
requests a valid password from the originating user. The
originating user must enter, via the DTE, a password that
can consist of digits and case-insensitive letters. Note that
DTE passwords can be from 1 to 6 characters in length.
The answering modem verifies the password against its
password database table, and if valid, completes the data
connection, thus allowing DTE data to be passed. As with
VF-side password entry, the answering modem must be a
3800Plus modem and the originating modem can be either
a 3800Plus modem or any vendor’s modem.
The following example illustrates the format of
DTE-side password:
abc123 (press Enter)
Where:
abc123 is a 10-alphanumeric character
number. characters used for DTE-side
passwords are case insensitive.
Combination of VF-Side and
DTE-Side Passwords
The previously described methods of password entry
can be combined to provide two layers of security. In this
case, the modems negotiate VF-side password entry prior
to training. If successful, the modems connect and then
prompt the originating user for a valid password. If
correctly entered, the modems connect.
November 1996
11-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Security Branch
The Security branch of the Top-Level menu allows you
to change and save parameters that are critical to the dial
access security password database. This database is a
collection of passwords and their associated parameters
that determine how the modems control password access.
Most of the functions within this branch are protected by
an Administrative Password. Once the correct password is
entered, these security functions appear on the modem’s
LCD. The two major functions that appear under the
Security branch are Set Access Control and Reset
Security.
Set Access Control allows you to configure critical
parameters contained within the security database table
that control dial access security. These parameters are
protected by an Administrative Password, which is an
8-digit decimal number.
Set Access Control contains the Edit Password Table,
Set Answer Security, Set Originate Security, and Set
Administrative Password security configuration groups.
These groups do not appear on the LCD until the correct
Administrative Password is entered.
Administrative Password
The Administrative Password is an 8-digit decimal
number password that allows only authorized users to
access Security branch functionality. This password must
be entered every time you access the Security branch.
This feature is shipped from the factory with the
Administrative Password set to 00000000.
Set Access Ctrl
Set Access Control allows you to change security
configuration. This function is protected by an
Administrative Password. The Reset Security function
allows you to reset the Administrative Password, but
results in erasure of the modem’s security database.
To access Security from the Top-Level menu, make the
following selections:
Once the correct Administrative Password is entered,
the Edit Password Table, Set Answer Security, Set
Originate Security, and Set Administrative Password
groups can be displayed on the LCD.
Idle : 28.8
Control Security
F1
Press the
Security.
11-4
F2
F3
key until Security appears. Select
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Security
EditPasswdTable
To enter your Administrative Password from
Set_Access_Ctrl, make the following selections:
Security
Set_Access_Ctrl
F1
F2
The Password Table is the modem’s security database.
It contains all essential information for each password
stored in the modem’s nonvolatile memory. The
information associated with each password is known as a
record. Records are identified by an index which is a
numeric name for a single record. A password’s record is
retrieved by entering its index.
>
F3
The Edit Password Table group allows you to view
and/or change the modem’s security database table. To do
this, you must retrieve a password’s records by selecting
its index. (See Select Index section, below.)
Select Set_Access_Ctrl from the Security branch.
Admin Password?
Entą Ą"00000000
F1
F2
The Edit Password Table group consists of the
following options: Select Index, Password Type, Edit
Password, and Save Edit.
F3
To access EditPasswdTable from Set Access Ctrl, make
the following selections:
The Administrative Password appears. This occurs
every time you enter the Security branch.
Set Access Ctrl
Edit PassWd Table
Select the F2 (") key to increment password values.
Press the
position.
key to move the cursor to the next
F1
Continue this sequence until the full Administrative
Password value appears and then press Ent.
Set Access Ctrl
Edit PassWd Table
F1
F2
F2
>
F3
Select EditPassWdTable.
>
Select Index
Select Index allows a specific record to be retrieved.
Index addresses range from 0001 to 0020 for all 3800Plus
modems and from 0001 to 3000 for a 3811Plus with
Extended Security. The contents of this record can be
viewed, edited, and saved.
F3
If the correct value is entered, the
EditPassWdTable group appears on the LCD.
To access Select Index, make the following selections:
Press the
key to scroll the Set Answer Security, Set
Originate Security, and Set Administrative Password
groups into view.
Set Access Ctrl
Edit PassWd Table
If an incorrect administrative password is entered, then
the message PassWrd Invalid appears as well as the last
password entered. Enter the correct password value or
press the
or
key to exit the Security branch.
F1
F2
>
F3
Select EditPassWdTable.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
11-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Keep the following in mind when scrolling down Edit
Password Table:
Select Index
Entą Ą" 0001
F1
F2
• The current function and index are displayed on the
LCD’s top line.
F3
• The LCD’s bottom line displays Nxt and all
selections available for the displayed security
option.
Select Index appears.
• Nxt indicates that more options are available by
scrolling down. It also indicates that the value
displayed on the LCD is the current setting.
Press the F2 (") key to increment index values.
Press the
position.
key to move the cursor to the next
Continue this sequence until the desired index appears,
and then press Ent.
If an index outside of the range is entered, the message
Index Too Big appears. Choose an index from the
database’s current index range.
After selecting an index, the Edit Password
Table group’s options (Password Type, Edit Password,
and Save Edit?) appear in a series of LCD displays.
• Use the
view.
and
keys to move selections into
• Use the F2 and F3 keys to choose selections.
• If no changes have been made, and the
key is
pressed, the LCD returns to the Top-Level menu.
• If changes have been made, and the
or
key
is pressed, then Save Edit? appears on the LCD.
Table 11-1 describes the settings of the Edit
Table Password group options.
11-6
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Security
Table 11-1
Edit Password Table Group Options
PsWdType xxxx
Nxt Cleared DTE Entry
VF_Entry
VF_plus_DTE
Password Type. Indicates whether this index location is configured for VF-side password, DTE-side password, or both.
Cleared displays for an index location that contains no valid entry. Note that this option only identifies the type of
password used. For proper operation, the type of password selected must be consistent with the type of security used.
Refer to the Set Answer Security group option found later in this chapter.
xxxx – Indicates the selected index location.
Cleared – Indicates that the index location does not contain any valid selections and is currently unused.
DTE Entry – Indicates that this index’s password is configured for DTE-side password entry. Special requirements apply
when using DTE passwords if the Set Answer Security option (Answer Security mode) is set to VF_&_DTE or
VF_w/_DTE. Refer to the note following VF plus DTE.
VF Entry – Indicates that this index’s password is configured for VF-side password entry. This selection requires that the
Set Answer Security option (Answer Security mode) be set to VF_&_DTE.
VF plus DTE – Indicates that both layers of password entry are used with this index’s password. This location is
configured so that the answering modem sends a prompt for the DTE-side password after receiving a valid VF-side
password. This setting requires that the Set Answer Security option be set to VF_&_DTE or VF_w/_DTE.
NOTE: If the Set Answer Security option (Answer Security mode) is set to VF_&_DTE or VF_w/_DTE, special
requirements apply in order to use passwords with their type set to DTE_Entry. The originating caller must first
enter a valid VF password. If the VF password entered is configured in the security database with the type
VF_plus_DTE, the user is then required to enter a password configured in the database table with the type
DTE_Entry. In the case of VF_w/_DTE mode, the DTE Entry password must immediately follow the
VF_plus_DTE password in the password table.
Edit PsWd xxxx
Nxt " yyyyyyyy or zzzzzz
Edit Password. Allows the password associated with this index to be changed.
NOTE: This security option does not appear if the Password Type option is set for Cleared.
xxxx – Indicates the current index location value.
yyyyyyyy – Indicates the current password value for this index. If the Password Type is VF_Entry or VF_plus_DTE, then
the password value is an 8-digit decimal number.
zzzzzz – Indicates the current password value for this index. If Password Type is configured for DTE_Entry, then the
password value is a 10-character alphanumeric number.
Save Edit? xxxx
Edit Save Yes No
Save Edit. Saves any changes made in the EditPassWdTable group.
xxxx – Indicates the current index field value.
Edit – Returns the LCD to the Password Type option and does not save any changes made to the index or password
table.
Save – Saves changes made to the index or Password Table. Once selected, the Select Index screen appears and
increments to the next index value.
Yes No – Appears only if changes are made to any of the options within the Password Table and the
or
is pressed before reaching the Save Edit? option. After deciding whether or not to save changes, the LCD displays
Select Index and increments to the next index value.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
key
11-7
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Set Answer Sec
To access Set_Answer_Sec from Set Access Ctrl, make
the following selections:
Set Answer Security determines if dial access security
is enabled or disabled. This method of inbound security is
configured in the answering modem. Although this also
appears under the Security Configuration Option group, it
can only be changed from the Set Answer Sec LCD
display in the Security branch.
Press the key until Set_Answer_Sec appears.
Select Set_Answer_Sec.
Table 11-2 describes the settings of the Set Answer
Security group option.
Table 11-2
Set Answer Security Group Options
Set Answer Sec
No_Answ_Sec DTE_Only
VF_&_DTE VF_w/_DTE
Set Answer Security. Is the primary method for enabling or disabling the dial access security function.
No Answer Security – Disables the dial access security feature.
DTE Only – The answering modem is enabled for security. The originating user must supply a password when
prompted.
Note that a call attempt never enters data mode if the answering modem is configured for DTE_Only and the originating
caller attempts to enter a password using only the VF-side password entry technique.
NOTE: In modem pooling applications where modems are connected to a multiline hunt group (rotary), all modems
must have this configuration option set to the same value.
VF_&_DTE – The answering modem is enabled for security. The modems negotiate security using the VF-side
password entry technique protocol. If successful, and the Password Type for this particular VF password is set for
VF_&_DTE, a password is requested from the originating user. If successful, the modems connect and can pass data.
NOTE: A call attempt fails if the answering modem is configured for VF_&_DTE and the originating caller does not first
enter a VF-side password.
VF_w/_DTE – Allows specification of related VF-Side and DTE-side password pairs. In this configuration, a DTE-side
password submitted must be a valid Password Table entry, and must match the particular entry associated with the valid
VF-side password that was submitted.
The passwords are associated with each other by their index in the Password Table: VF_plus_DTE passwords occupy
odd-numbered index locations; their DTE_Entry counterparts occupy the even-numbered index locations that
immediately follow. So, for example, if a VF-side password is entered that matches the entry in index location 11, the
DTE-side password subsequently entered must match the entry in index location 12.
VF_plus_DTE passwords must be unique in a VF_w/_DTE configuration. An attached DTE in asynchronous operation is
required for DTE-side password entry.
Up to 10 password pairs are permitted. On the 3811Plus modem this can be optionally increased with the Expanded
Password Table feature, which permits 1500 password pairs.
11-8
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Security
Set Orig Sec
To access Set_Orig_Sec from Set Access Ctrl, make
the following selections:
Set Originate Security controls whether or not the
modem can originate a call using AT commands when the
dial access security feature is installed. This method of
outbound security only applies to modems originating a
call.
Set Access Ctrl
Set_Orig_Sec
F1
Press the
F2
F3
key until Set_Orig_Sec appears.
Select Set_Orig_Sec.
Table 11-3 describes the settings of the Set Originate
Security group option.
Table 11-3
Set Originate Security Group Options
Set Orig Sec
No_OrigSec EnaOrigSec
Set Originate Security. Controls the security protection for origination of calls when AT commands are used.
The originate password must be included in all AT dial command strings if this configuration option is enabled. If not
included, or incorrectly entered, the message ERROR is returned to the DTE. The Originate Security password must be
defined as a DTE_Entry password type.
No Originate Security – Disables originate security so that a modem can originate a call using AT commands.
Enable Originate Security – When using AT commands, the modem will only place a call if a valid password is entered
along with an AT dial command. If the password is not entered, then ERROR is returned to the DTE, and the dial
command is canceled.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
11-9
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Set Admin PsWd
Reset Security
Set Administrative Password is used to change the
Administrative Password value. The Administrative
Password is an 8-digit decimal number that allows
authorized users to enter the Access Security Control
function.
Reset Security is the second major function within the
Security branch of the Top-Level menu. It erases all
contents of the security database table and resets all index
locations to Cleared. Two selections appear under Reset
Security: Abort Security Reset and Erase All PassWords.
Use Reset Security if you want to redo the entire security
database table.
NOTE
If this value is forgotten, then the
only way to access any of the
security functions is by selecting
Reset Security. This restores the
password to a known value*, but
erases the contents of the
modem’s security database.
CAUTION
This function can be used as
a last resort if the
Administrative Password is
no longer known. This
function causes the
Administrative Password to
default to the Reset Default
password, and erases the
contents of the database
table.
To change the Administrative Password, make the
following selections:
Set Access Ctrl
Set_Admin_PsWd
F1
F2
<
To reset security, make the following selections:
F3
Security:
Reset_Security
Press
until Set_Admin_PsWd appears.
F1
F2
<
F3
Select Set_Admin_PsWd.
From the Security branch, press
Reset_Security appears.
Set Admin PsWd
Ent
" 00000000
until
Select Reset_Security.
F1
F2
F3
Reset Security
Abort_Sec_Reset
The Administrative Password appears.
Press the F2 (") key to increment password values.
F1
Press the
key to move the cursor to the next
position. Continue this sequence until the new password
value is entered.
Press the F1 key to save the new password value.
F2
>
F3
To abort this function, select Abort_Sec_Reset.
Nothing is erased and the LCD returns to the main
security display.
* This value appears as a single number on the last page of this document.
11-10
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Security
Reset Security
Erase_All_PassWd
F1
F2
A VF-side password can be entered with the AT dial
command. The following examples illustrate two ways to
enter a VF-side password:
<
ATDT5551234W12345678#
F3
or
To reset security, press
appears on the LCD.
ATDP5551234T@12345678#
until Erase_All_PassWd
Select Erase_All_PassWd.
The entire security database is erased and the
Administrative Password defaults to the Reset Default
password value. This value appears as a single number on
the last page of this document.
PRESS:
Enter
Where:
ATD is the AT dial command.
P and T are Pulse dial and Tone (DTMF)
dial modifiers.
5551234 is the phone number.
W is the second dial tone dial modifiers.
@ is the wait for quiet answer dial
modifiers.
Security Password Entry
Techniques
12345678 is the password. VF-side
passwords must consist of 1–8 decimal
digits.
The previous sections described how to set up and
configure your network for dial access security. Once
configured and enabled, you must now supply a password
to originate or answer a call.
# is the password terminator character.
The following examples demonstrate how to enter an
Answer Access security password string and an Originate
Access password string. Note that dial access security
messages, that may appear on the LCD, are listed in
Table 4-3 in Chapter 4.
NOTE
While pulse dial can be used to
originate the call, DTMF tones
must be used for the password.
This can be accomplished by
using the P and T modifiers
appropriately. Refer to the Dial
command in Chapter 13, AT
Command Set and S-Registers,
for more information about
modifiers.
Answer Access Password (VF-Side and
DTE-Side Entry Techniques)
Answer Access password security uses two password
entry techniques: VF-side password and DTE-side
password entry. A VF-side password consists of DTMF
tones and is entered by the originating caller via the
AT command set, the DCP, or manually with an attached
telephone.
3980-A2-GB30-20
Some originating modems may not recognize the
W modifier as a wait for second dial tone. If your call
disconnects due to a VF Password Timeout or an
Unknown VF Password, first verify that the answering
3800Plus modem’s VF Prompt Type is set for 2nd Dial
Tone. Next, verify that the Dial Tone Detect configuration
option in the originating modem is enabled. Third, insert
several Pause (,) modifiers into the dial string instead of
the W modifier. (For the 3800Plus modem, each Pause,
which is determined by the Pause Time configuration
option (S8), is equal to 2 seconds.) This allows a delay
between the processing of the phone number by the
answering modem and the transmission of the VF-side
password by the originating modem.
November 1996
11-11
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Some experimentation may be necessary to determine
the number of pauses necessary for your call.
Database Table Examples
The following examples illustrate possible database
tables in which the password type is configured for VF
Entry, DTE Entry or a combination of VF, DTE, and VF
plus DTE Entry. These tables are shown for illustrative
purposes only. Passwords shown are not representative of
good password selections.
A DTE-side password is entered after the modems
have trained, but before a normal connection is
established. The following example illustrates how to
enter a DTE-side password:
TYPE:
abc123
PRESS:
Enter
Where:
abc123 is a 10-alphanumeric character
password. characters used for DTE-side
passwords are case-insensitive. DTE-side
passwords can be from 1 to 6 characters
in length.
NOTE
The Assigned to column is not
stored in the modem.
Table 11-4 is an example of a database table with
passwords configured for VF Entry only. This type of
password is entered within the AT command dial string.
If a valid password is entered, then the modems
connect and data can pass.
Originate Access Password
An Originate Access password is entered by a local
user to gain access to a local 3800Plus modem. This
password is embedded in the AT dial command and
cannot be entered from the diagnostic control panel
(DCP). The password must be defined as a DTE_Entry
type in the password table.
The following example describes how to enter an
Originate Access security password:
TYPE:
ATD%abc123%T9,8005551234
PRESS:
Enter
Where:
ATD is the AT dial command.
% is the start and stop dial string
command interrupt characters; the
Originate Access password must be
enclosed by these characters.
Table 11-4
Security Database Table
Using VF-Side Passwords
VF Password Only
Index
Password
Type
Assigned to
21
1
VF_Entry
Denver office
31
12
VF_Entry
Chicago office
41
1212
VF_Entry
Dallas office
51
953246
VF_Entry
Miami office,
modem 1
52
46958373
VF_Entry
Miami office,
modem 2
61
32562682
VF_Entry
Atlanta office
abc123 is the 10-alphanumeric character
Originate Access password.
T is the Tone (DTMF) dial modifier.
Comma (,) is a pause dial parameter.
98005551234 is the phone number.
11-12
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Security
Table 11-5 is an example of a database table with
passwords configured for DTE Entry only. This type of
password is entered via the originating user’s DTE.
Table 11-6 is an example of a security database table
that uses a mixture of VF and DTE passwords.
Table 11-6
Security Database Table Using
Both VF-Side and DTE-Side Password
Table 11-5
Security Database Table
Using DTE-Side Password
VF and DTE Passwords
DTE Password Only
Index
Password
Type
Index
Assigned to
Password
Type
Assigned to
121
1
VF_Entry
Denver office*
131
12
VF_plus_DTE
Chicago
office**
User C
141
1212
VF_plus_DTE
Dallas office**
DTE_Entry
User D
151
953246
VF_plus_DTE
Miami office,
modem 1**
z
DTE_Entry
User E
152
46958373
VF_plus_DTE
3g8sX4
DTE_Entry
User F
Miami office,
modem 2**
161
32562682
VF_Entry
Atlanta office*
1131
winter
DTE_Entry
User C,
Chicago
office**
1141
summer
DTE_Entry
User A, Dallas
office**
1142
spring
DTE_Entry
User B, Dallas
office**
1151
fall
DTE_Entry
User D, Miami
office**
1152
z
DTE_Entry
User E, Miami
office**
1153
3g8sX4
DTE_Entry
User F, Miami
office**
1001
winter
DTE_Entry
User A
1002
summer
DTE_Entry
User B
1003
spring
DTE_Entry
1004
fall
1005
1006
* Users in the Denver and Atlanta offices are
connected to the DTE after entering a valid VF
password (and the modems train and negotiate error
control) without entering a DTE password.
** Users at the Chicago, Dallas, and Miami offices are
required to enter a DTE password after the VF
password is entered via the AT dial command.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
11-13
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 11-7 is an example of a security database table
that uses paired VF and DTE passwords for use in
VF_w/_DTE answer security mode.
Table 11-7
Security Database Table Using Paired
VF-Side and DTE-Side Passwords
VF and DTE Passwords
Index
Password
Type
Assigned to
02
user1
DTE_Entry
User A Logon
ID*
03
00110002
VF_plus_DTE
User B,
Denver office
04
ralph
DTE_Entry
User B Logon
ID*
05
4695873
VF_plus_DTE
Berlin office
06
guest
DTE_Entry
Guest Logon
ID*
07
4695873
VF_plus_DTE
Berlin office
08
actmgr
DTE_Entry
Account
Manager
Logon ID*
09
350647
VF_plus_DTE
User C
10
miami
DTE_Entry
Miami office*
11
00159766
VF_plus_DTE
User D
12
miami
DTE_Entry
Miami office*
* For this password to be valid, the VF_plus_DTE
password entered must be the one immediately
preceding the DTE_Entry password in the table.
11-14
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Fax Operation
12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Fax Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Overview
The procedures for sending and receiving facsimile
documents with your modem depend on the fax software
you use. This chapter does not contain specific
procedures, but rather information that may make it easier
for you to use the documentation that came with your fax
software.
• You must have configured your modem according
to the specifications of your fax software manual.
For example:
Fax Operation
Your modem, in combination with your computer and
fax software, is capable of emulating the functions of a
fax machine. You can use it to send and receive fax files
in communication with another fax modem, or with a
standard fax machine. These fax files are images turned
into the sort of data that can be stored in your computer.
Fax machines and fax modems use special protocols
different from those used by standard modems. The
device you intend to communicate with must be
compatible with your modem, which means that it must
be capable of using the same protocol. Your 3800Plus
modem supports Class 1 (EIA 578) and Class 2 (EIA/TIA
SP-2388) Group III fax, using V.17, V.29, or V.27ter
modulations.
— Some fax software requires that the modem
have Auto-Answer disabled. You can set this
using the AutoAnswerRing# configuration
option under the Line Dialer branch, or by
issuing the ATS0=0 command.
— Some fax software requires that the modem use
software flow control. You can set this using
the FlwCntlofDTE and FlwCntlofMdm
configuration options under the
V.42/MNP/Buffer branch, or by issuing an
AT\Q1 command.
— DTR Action should be set for standard
RS-232D operation. Use the Stndrd_RS232
setting of DTR Action (in the DTE Interface
configuration options group), or the AT&D2
command.
— LSD (Line Signal Detect) Control should be set
for standard RS-232D operation. Use the
Stndrd_RS232 setting of LSD Control (in the
DTE Interface configuration options group), or
the AT&C1 command.
— Data should be buffered during Error Control
(EC) negotiation. Use the Enable setting of EC
Negotiate Bufr (in the V.42/MNP/Buffer
configuration options group), or the AT\C1
command.
Before you can send or receive a fax, the following
must be true:
• You must have fax software installed on your
computer.
• Your modem must be online with a compatible fax
modem or fax machine.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
12-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
There are no Diagnostic Control Panel (DCP) functions
unique to fax operation. If your fax software requires that
you change the configuration of your modem, see the
appropriate sections of Chapter 8, Configure Branch.
The DCP is disabled during fax operation.
Your fax software uses AT commands to tell the
modem what to do. These commands, and the replies your
modem makes (such as “OK”) may be displayed on your
computer terminal during fax operation, but this depends
on your software. You do not have to issue AT commands
yourself, unless you use AT commands to configure the
modem.
For more information about fax operation, see the
manual that came with your fax software.
12-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and
S-Registers
13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Register List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Register Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-2
13-2
13-5
13-14
13-14
Switching Between Data Mode and Online
Command Mode
Overview
The AT command set provides an alternative method to
the front panel for entering commands that control the
operation and configuration of the 3800Plus modems.
AT commands are issued from an asynchronous DTE
(such as a personal computer). This chapter explains how
to use AT commands and lists the modifiers for all
AT commands supported by the 3800Plus modems.
Sometimes it is necessary to change operating
parameters while the modems are online. The escape
sequence allows you to toggle the modem between Data
mode and online Command mode while maintaining a
connection with the remote modem. This is accomplished
using the escape sequence (+++) to exit Data mode and
the O command to return to Data mode.
Operating Modes
Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time
The 3800Plus modem has two operating modes:
Command mode and Data mode. Before a modem goes
online (establishes a successful connection with a remote
modem), it is considered to be in Command mode, an idle
state where you can modify its operating parameters or
issue modem commands.
The escape sequence is only issued when the modem is
online and in Data mode. The 3800Plus modem uses three
consecutive plus (+) characters as the escape sequence.
(To change this value, refer to S-register S2 discussed
later in Table 13-2 in the S-Register Format section.)
In Command mode, any command issued is
acknowledged with a response in either words or digits
known as a result code. Refer to Appendix B for a list of
result codes.
Once the modems go online, either by answering or
originating a call, they automatically switch to Data mode.
Data mode is a state where any entries made from the
DTE are considered data and are transmitted and received
between modems. The modems remain in Data mode until
the connection is broken or until they are forced into
online Command mode using the escape sequence.
3980-A2-GB30-20
To prevent the modem from interpreting an embedded
+++ in data as an escape sequence, the Escape Guard
Time value determines the length of the pause before and
after the escape sequence is issued. The 3800Plus modem
uses a one second pause as the Escape Guard Time. (To
change this value, refer to S-Register S12 discussed later
in Table 13-2 in the S-Register Format section.)
To enter online Command mode while in Data mode,
enter the following sequence:
November 1996
TYPE:
+++
13-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Use the O command to return to Data mode from
online Command mode. Enter the following command:
TYPE:
ATO
PRESS:
Enter
• Valid commands are acknowledged with numeric or
word result codes (unless the result codes have been
disabled using the Q1 command). Appendix B lists
result codes with numeric and word equivalents.
Any-Key Abort
Command Guidelines
Review the following guidelines before using any AT
Commands.
• The escape sequence (+++) is used to enter online
Command mode from Data mode.
• The asynchronous character format for the AT
command set must be one of the following:
• The AT command set is enabled.
• The modem is in the process of answering or
originating a call.
— 8 data bits + no parity + 1 stop bit.
AT Command List
— 7 data bits + no parity + 2 stop bits.
AT commands are issued from an asynchronous DTE,
such as a PC, and control the modem’s operation and
software configuration. AT commands are only applicable
when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for
AT. (See &Mn and &Qn commands.)
— 7 data bits + parity + 1 stop bit (parity can be
odd, even, mark, or space).
• All commands (except A/ (repeat last command)
and +++) must begin with the characters AT and
end by pressing the Enter key. The AT (or at) prefix
clears the command buffer and matches the modem
speed and parity to that of the DTE. Commands can
be upper- or lowercase, but the modem will not
recognize mixed case prefixes (At or aT).
• Commands can be entered one at a time or in
strings. Strings can have up to 40 characters after
the AT prefix. You can use spaces, hyphens (–), and
parentheses ( ) as fillers to make the commands
easier to read; the modem ignores these fillers and
they are not counted among the characters which
make up the command string. Commands must be
entered on one line and end with the carriage return
character (Enter key).
• Commands with the suffix n have several options
associated with them. For example, in the
Ln command, L1 sets the speaker volume to
Low and L3 sets the speaker volume to High. If no
value is entered for the n suffix, the modem
assumes a zero (0) value.
• The A/ command (without pressing the Enter key)
causes the modem to repeat the last command
entered.
13-2
The any-key abort function aborts a call establishment
attempt when a character is received from the DTE under
the following conditions:
Table 13-1 lists all AT commands supported by the
3800Plus modem. The first column lists the AT command.
The second column defines and lists all possible values
for that command. The Async Dial factory default is listed
in bold. The third column lists the key sequence used to
enter the equivalent front panel command. Use this
reference to locate commands in Chapters 4 through 10 if
further description is necessary.
AT Command Format
AT commands are entered in Command mode using the
following format:
TYPE:
ATXn
Where:
X is the AT command and n is the
specific value for that command.
PRESS:
Enter
In Table 13-1, the value for X is listed in the AT
Command column and the value for n is listed in the
Description column.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-1
(1 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
Description
AT Command
Front Panel Branch
A/
Repeat Last Command
Re-executes last command string. (Not to be preceded with AT or followed
by pressing the Return key.)
A
Answer Mode
Goes off-hook and attempts to establish a connection without waiting for a
ring.
None
Dn
Dial
Begins the dialing sequence. The dial string n (modifiers and telephone
number) is entered after the D command.
Any digit 0–9, * , # , A, B, C, D, may be dialed as a DTMF tone. Only the
digits 0–9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode.
None
If any character is received from the DTE before the modem goes online,
the dial sequence is aborted. This is known as any-key abort.
The following example shows how to dial through a PBX. The dial string
consists of the command string and the telephone number:
ATD9W5551234
Command
Telephone
String
Number
Dial String
Modifiers include the following parameters:
T – Tone (DTMF) dial. Any digit 0–9, * , #, A, B, C, or D can be dialed as
tone.
P – Pulse dial. Only the digits 0–9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode.
NOTE: Once a dialing method (tone or pulse) has been specified, it will
only remain active until the end of that dial string. The factory
setting is tone dial.
W or + – Wait for dial tone. Modem waits for a second dial tone before
processing the dial string. This can be the initial dial tone or a second
tone received when dialing through a tandem PBX (for example,
9+555-6789), or when invoking special features (for example,
70#W555-6789, where 70# disables Call Waiting).
R – Reverse Dial mode. Causes the originating modem to send out an
answertone once it no longer detects ringback. (Ringback is the ring
you hear at the originating site when making a call.) The R parameter
must be the last character in the dial string. For correct operation, at
least one ringback must be detected; therefore, the remote modem
should be configured to answer on the second ring or subsequent
rings.
@ – Quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the
number. If the silence is not detected, the modem sends either a NO
ANSWER result to the DTE.
!–
3980-A2-GB30-20
Hook flash. This causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5 seconds
then return to off-hook.
November 1996
13-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-1
(2 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
Dn (Cont’d)
Description
,–
Pause. Causes the modem to pause before processing the next
character in the dial string. The length of this pause is determined by
the setting of the Pause Time configuration option (see Line Dialer
configuration option group) or by value held in S-register S8.
;–
Return to Command mode. Modem returns to Command mode after
dialing a number without disconnecting the call. This is useful when
the number exceeds 40 characters, or when the wait time between
parts of a dial string is unknown. This modifier disables the any-key
abort function.
Front Panel Branch
Space, – , and ( ) . These characters are ignored by the dial string and can
be included in the dial string to enhance readability.
DS=n
Dial Stored Number
Dials the number stored in Location n (1–10). (To store a telephone
number, refer to the &Zn=x command.)
Call Setup\Dial\
Dial Directory:
If any character is received from the DTE before the modem goes online,
the dial sequence is aborted. This is known as any-key abort.
En
Command Character Echo
E0
Disables echo to the DTE.
E1
Enables echo to the DTE.
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
Hn
Hook Switch Control
H0
Modem goes on-hook.
H1
Modem goes off-hook.
H0: Call
Setup\Disconnect
or
Control\Remove Make
Busy
H1: Control\ Make Busy
In
Identification
I0
Displays product code; default is 144.
I1
Displays 3-digit firmware revision number.
Performs an EPROM check.
I2
I3
Displays the modem’s serial number.
I4
Displays the modem’s model number. The model number of a
3810Plus begins with 3980. The model number of a 3811Plus
begins with 3981. The model number of a 3820Plus begins with
3982.
I5
Displays the part number of the circuit card.
I6
Displays the firmware release number.
I9
Displays 3-digit firmware revision number (same as I1).
I10=n Changes the value of the product code displayed by the
I0 command; n is a number from 0 to 4:
I10=0 sets product code to 144
I10=1 sets product code to 240
I10=2 sets product code to 480
I10=3 sets product code to 960
I10=4 sets product code to 120
I11
Performs a checksum of the modem’s firmware and displays the
results in hexadecimal. (There is no DCP equivalent of this
command.)
I19
Displays the entire firmware revision level.
Status\Identity
13-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-1
(3 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
Ln
Speaker Volume
L0
Selects low volume.
L1
Selects low volume.
L2
Selects medium volume
L3
Selects high volume.
Control\Speaker
Configure\Edit\Misc
Mn
Speaker On/Off
M0
Speaker always off.
M1
Speaker on until carrier signal is detected.
M2
Speaker always on.
Control\Speaker
Configure\Edit\Misc
O
Return to Online or Data Mode
Returns modem to Data mode from Online Command mode.
None
P
Pulse Dial
Sets the modem for pulse dial mode. See the Dn command.
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Qn
Result Codes
Q0
Enables modem to send result codes to the DTE.
Q1
Disables modem from sending result codes to the DTE.
Q2
Enables in Originate mode only for modem to send result codes to
the DTE. Required for most UNIXr applications.
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
Sr= n
Change S-Register
Changes contents of S-register (where r is the S-Register, and n is the
new value).
None
Sr?
Display S-Register
Displays value of S-register where r is the S-register number.
None
T
Tone Dial
Sets the modem for tone dial mode.
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Vn
Result Codes Format
V0
Displays result codes in Number (1) format digits.
V1
Displays result codes as text.
V2
Displays result codes in Number (2) format (digits).
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
13-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-1
(4 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
Xn
Description
Front Panel Branch
Extended Result Code, Dial Tone Detect, and Busy Tone Detect
Configuration Options
Dial
Busy
Extended
Tone
Tone
Result Code
Detect
Detect
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Add/EC
Add/V42,MNP
Use DTE Rate
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Extended Result Code:
Configure\Edit\DTE Dialer
Dial Tone Detect:
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Busy Tone Detect:
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Extended Result Code
Enable. Displays all result codes listed in Appendix B except for error
control suffix.
Disable. Only displays OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR.
Add/EC. Displays result codes with /EC suffix. Add/V42,MNP. Displays
result codes with either V.42 or MNP suffix. Use DTE Rate.
Displays DTE data rate instead of line rate.
Add/V42,MNP. Displays result codes with either V.42 or MNP suffix.
Use DTE Rate. Displays DTE data rate instead of line rate.
Dial Tone Detect
Enable. Sets the modem for dial tone detect.
Disable. Sets the modem for blind dialing.
Busy Tone Detect
Enable. Modem monitors for busy tone.
Disable. Modem ignores busy tone.
Yn
Long Space Disconnect
Y0
Disable. Ignores long space.
Y1
Enable. Disconnects if long space is detected. Enables
transmission of a long space.
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Zn
Reset and Load Active
Z0
Loads configuration options from Active (Saved) to Active
(Operating).
Z1
Loads configuration options from Customer 1 to Active (Operating).
Z2
Loads configuration from Customer 2 to Active (Operating).
Z3
Loads configuration options from Active (Saved) to Active
(Operating) and performs a reset (if the modem is connected, it is
disconnected).
Z9
Performs a full modem reset, as if the power were turned off and
on.
Control\Reset
13-6
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-1
(5 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
&Cn
LSD Control
&C0 Forced On. LSD on at all times.
&C1 Standard RS232. LSD is on when the remote modem’s carrier
signal is detected. LSD is off when carrier signal is not detected.
&C2 Wink When Disconnect. LSD normally forced ON, turns Off for
approximately one second upon disconnecting.
&C3 Follows DTR. State of LSD follows state of DTR.
&C4 Simulated Control Carrier. State of LSD follows state of remote
modem’s RTS.
&C5 =DTR/Disconnect Off. State of LSD follows state of DTR except
upon a disconnect where DTR remains ON and LSD turns Off. DTR
must then toggle Off and ON to turn LSD ON. Use this setting for
AT&T DATAKITr applications. Note that to use this configuration
option, the DTR Action configuration option must be set to
Stndrd_RS232 (&D1 or &D2).
&C6 Bridge Retrain. LSD behaves as if it were set for Stndrd_RS232,
except that it is turned off when a retrain condition lasts longer than
10 seconds, and turned on again when no retrain condition is
detected for a period of 10 seconds.
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
&Dn
DTR Action
&D0 Ignore. Modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats it as
always ON.
&D1 Off=Command Mode. Modem enters online Command Mode if
connected when DTR switches Off.
&D2 Standard RS232. DTR Signal is controlled by the DTE.
&D3 Off=Reload Strap. Follows Standard RS232 operation, except that
when DTR switches Off, the modem loads the Active (Saved) area
into the Active (Operating) area.
&D4 Controls On-Hook. Follows Standard RS232 operation, except that
modem does not disconnect until DTR is lowered by the DTE.
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
13-7
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-1
(6 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
&Fn
Description
Select Factory Default Configuration Options
Loads factory configuration options into Active (Operating) area.
&F0 Async Dial
&F1 Sync Dial
&F2 Sync Leased: Answer
&F3 UNIX Dial
&F4 Sync Leased: Originate
&F5 Cellular (Mobile)
&F6 Cellular (PSTN)
If your modem is attached to a cellular telephone, use the &F5 command
to configure the modem for cellular communications. &F5
(Cellular(Mobile)) sets the following configuration options:
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Factory
AT
Command Value
Option
Maximum Frame Size
\A4
Error Control Mode
\N4
Auto-Answer Rings
S0=3
No Answer Timeout
S7=120
No Carrier Disconnect
S10=100
V.32bis Train
S43=1
V.32bis Autorate
S76=3
V.42 ARQ Window Size
S89=9
Cellular Enhancements
S91=1
If your modem is attached to a normal dial telephone line but sometimes
communicates with a modem that is attached to a cellular phone, use the
&F6 command. &F6 (Cellular(PSTN)) sets the following configuration
options:
AT
Command Value
Option
Transmit Level
&I99
Error Control Mode
\N4
No Answer Timeout
S7=120
No Carrier Disconnect
S10=100
V.32bis Train
S43=1
V.42 ARQ Window Size
S89=9
Cellular Enhancements
S91=1
The &F0, &F3, &F5, and &F6 commands leave the modem in
AT Command mode. The other commands place the modem into
Dumb mode. The only way to return to AT command control is via
the front panel.
&Gn
13-8
V.22bis Guard Tone
&G0 Disable.
&G1 550 Hz.
&G2 1800 Hz.
Configure\Edit\Dial Line
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-1
(7 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
&I
Description
Front Panel Branch
Dial Transmit Level
Configure\Edit\Dial Line
When Dial Transmit Level Type is set to Permissive, &In sets Dial Transmit
Level to a value between –10 and –32 dBm. &I99 and &I100 cause the
level to be varied automatically according to conditions for Enhanced
Throughput Cellular (ETC) operation.
&I10
&I11
S
S
&I32
&I99
–10 dBm
–11 dBm
S
S
–32 dBm
Automatically adjusted according to the ETC1.0 specification. Use
only with remote modems set to &I99, and limit the data rate to
4800 bps (S41=5). Set by &F6.
&I100 Automatically adjusted according to the ETC1.1 specification.
NOTE: &J0 overrides this command; &In overrides the &J0 command.
&Jn
Dial Transmit Level Type
&J0 Permissive (Approx. – 9 dBm).
NOTE: &J0 overrides the &In command; &In overrides the
&J0 command.
Configure\Edit\Dial Line
&Ln
Leased Mode
&L0 Disables leased-line operation.
&L1 2-wire originate leased-line operation.
&L2 4-wire originate leased-line operation.
&L3 2-wire answer leased-line operation.
&L4 4-wire answer leased-line operation.
The &L command will cause the modem to reset before entering or exiting
Leased-Line mode. Therefore, it must be entered as the last command in
an initialization string. The modem must be in Sync Leased mode (&F2 or
&F4) for the &L command to work.
Configure\Edit\Leased
Line
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
13-9
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-1
(8 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
&Mn
and &Qn
Description
Async/Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type
&M0, &Q0 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode and uses
AT Command protocol.
&M1, &Q1 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and uses
AT Command protocol.
&M2, &Q2 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and dials telephone
number stored in directory location 1 when DTR signal turns
Off and then ON.
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
&M3, &Q3
Modem operates in Synchronous mode and uses
AT Command protocol.
&M231, &Q231 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode; the DTE Dialer
Type is disabled.
&M232, &Q232 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode; V.25bis Async
dialing is enabled.
&M233, &Q233 Modem operates in Synchronous mode; V.25bis Bisync
dialing is enabled.
&M234, &Q234 Modem operates in Synchronous mode; V.25bis HDLC
dialing is enabled.
&M235, &Q235 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode; AT&T
Exclusive dialing is enabled.
&M236, &Q236 Modem operates in Synchronous mode; the DTE Dialer
Type is disabled.
The &M2, &Q2, &M231, &Q231, &M236, and &Q236 commands disable
the use of AT commands and force the modem into Dumb mode. The only
way to gain control of the modem is the front panel.
&Rn
RTS Action
&R0 Standard RS232. RTS must be ON for the DTE to transmit to the
modem.
&R1 Ignores RTS. Modem acts as if RTS is always ON.
&R2 Simulated Control Carrier. RTS input controls the remote modem’s
LSD signal.
&R3 Control Carrier. The DTE’s RTS signal controls the modem’s carrier
signal.
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
&Sn
DSR Control
&S0 Forced On. DSR output is constantly ON.
&S1 Standard RS232. The modem controls DSR to the DTE, turning ON
DSR when handshaking begins, and Off upon disconnect.
&S2 Wink When Disconnect. DSR is normally ON, but is forced Off
momentarily during a disconnect.
&S3 Follows DTR. When the modem receives DTR from the DTE, it
sends DSR to the DTE.
&S4 On Early. DSR is Off when the modem is in an idle state, and goes
ON when a command is received to enter Data mode.
&S5 Delay to Data. Like Standard RS232, but DSR is not turned ON
until the modem is in Data mode.
&S6 Dial Backup Toggle. DSR is turned Off during a dial backup attempt,
and ON when the attempt is completed.
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
13-10
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-1
(9 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
&Tn
Description
Tests
&T0
&T1
&T2
&T3
&T4
&T5
&T6
&T7
&T8
&T9
Abort. Stops any test in progress.
Local Analog Loop.
Pattern. Transmits and receives a 511 Bit Error Rate Test (BERT).
Local Digital Loopback test.
Enables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option.
Disables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration
option.
Remote Digital Loopback test.
Remote Digital Loopback with Pattern.
Local Loopback with Pattern.
Self-Test.
Front Panel Branch
Test
&T4 and &T5:
Configure\Edit\Tests
&Vn
View Configuration Options
Displays each configuration group within the Active (Operating), Active
(Saved), Customer 1, and Customer 2 configuration areas as well as the
telephone numbers stores in directory locations 1–10.
The output of the &V command can be saved to a file and printed (using
your communications software), providing both a record of your
configuration and a worksheet for configuration enhancements.
&V0 Active (Operating) configuration options.
&V1 Active (Saved) configuration options.
&V2 Customer 1 configuration options.
&V3 Customer 2 configuration options.
&V4 Directory locations 1–10.
None
&Wn
Write (Save to Memory)
Saves the current configuration options in Active (Operating) to one of
three configuration areas. This is required to make any configuration
changes permanent.
&W0 Saved to Active(Save).
&W1 Saved to Customer 1.
&W2 Saved to Customer 2.
Configure\Save
&Xn
Transmit Clock Source
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
&X0 Internal. Modem provides transmit clock source for synchronous
data (Pin 15).
&X1 External. Modem derives external transmit clock source provided on
Pin 24 for synchronous data.
&X2 Receive Clock Loop. Modem derives transmit clock source from
receive signal for synchronous data (Pin 17).
&Zn=x
Store Telephone Numbers
Modem saves the telephone numbers and dial command modifiers (if any)
entered for x (up to 40 characters in length) in Directory Location n (1–10).
For example, the command AT&Z1=5551234 stores the telephone number
555-1234 into directory location 1.
To clear a telephone number from a memory location, issue the
&Zn =x command without entering a telephone number.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Call Setup\
Change Directory
13-11
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-1
(10 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
\An
Error Control Maximum Frame Size
\A0 64
\A1 128
\A2 192
\A3 256
\A4 32
\A5 16
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
\Cn
Error Control Negotiate Buffer
\C0 Disable.
\C1 Enable.
\C2 Disables and switches modem to Buffer mode.
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
\Dn
CTS Control
\D0 Forced On. Forces CTS to always ON.
\D1 Standard RS232.
\D2 Wink When Disconnect. CTS is turned Off for 1 to 2 seconds upon
a disconnect.
\D3 Follows DTR. The state of CTS follows the state of DTR.
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
\Gn
Modem to Modem Flow Control
\G0 Disable.
\G1 Enable.
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
\Kn
Break Buffer Control, Send Break Control, Break Forces Escape
Break Buffer Control:
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
Send Break Control:
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
Break Forces Escape:
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
\K0
\K1
\K2
\K3
\K4
\K5
\K6
\Nn
13-12
Break
Buffer
Control
Send
Break
Control
Break
Forces
Escape
Discard Data
Discard Data
Keep Data
Keep Data
Keep Data
Keep Data
Discard Break
Break First
Break First
Break First
Break First
Data First
Data First
Not Applic.
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Error Control Mode
\N0 Buffer Mode.
\N1 Direct Mode.
\N2 MNP or Disconnect.
\N3 MNP or Buffer.
\N4 V.42/MNP or Disconnect.
\N5 V.42/MNP or Buffer.
\N6 LAPM or Disconnect.
\N7 LAPM or Buffer.
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-1
(11 of 11)
3800Plus AT Commands
AT Command
\Qn
Description
Flow Control of DTE, Flow Control of Modem
\Q0
\Q1
\Q2
\Q3
\Q4
\Q5
\Q6
Flow
Control
of DTE
Flow
Control of
Modem
Disable
XON/XOFF
CTS to DTE
CTS to DTE
XON/XOFF
Disable
Disable
Disable
XON/XOFF
Disable
RTS to Mdm
Disable
XON/XOFF
RTS to Mdm
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
\Tn
No Data Disconnect Timer
\T0
Disable.
\Tn
Where n is a value from 1 to 255 in 1-minute increments.
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
\Xn
XON/XOFF Passthrough Flow Control
\X0 Disable.
\X1 Enable.
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
%An
Error Control Fallback Character
%An Where n is an ASCII value from 0 to 127. Factory default is
013 ASCII.
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
%Cn
MNP5 Data Compression
%C0 Disable.
%C1 Enable.
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
IHn
V.42bis Compression
IH0 Disable.
IH1 Transmit only. (Not available from DCP.)
IH2 Receive only. (Not available from DCP.)
IH3 Transmit and Receive. (Equivalent to Enabled option on DCP.)
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
+FCLASS=n
Service Class Selection
Normally set by fax software, Service Class Selection determines the fax
protocol. The command is sent to the modem in the format +FCLASS=n,
where n can be set to one of three values:
0=Data
1=Class 1 Fax (EIA 578)
2=Class 2 Fax (EIA/TIA SP-2388 dated 20 August 1990)
In the format +FCLASS?, the +FCLASS command returns the current
Service Class: 0, 1, or 2. In the format +FCLASS=?, the +FCLASS
command returns the Service Classes available: 0, 1, 2.
NOTE: Other fax commands supported by the 3800Plus modems are not
documented in this manual because they are not normally issued
by the user. They follow the EIA 578 and EIA/TIA SP-2388
specifications.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
13-13
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
S-Register List
S-Register Format
S-registers affect the operating parameters of 3800Plus
modems. S-registers are only applicable when the DTE
Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT. (See &Mn
command.)
S-registers can be displayed and/or modified when the
modem is in Command mode. To display the value of an
S-register, issue the following command:
Table 13-2 lists all S-registers supported by 3800Plus
modems. The first column lists the S-register. The second
column lists all possible values for that register. The third
column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent
from the front panel. Use the reference in this column to
locate commands in Chapter 8 if further description is
necessary.
TYPE:
ATSn?
Where:
n is the register number
PRESS:
Enter
To modify the value of an S-register, issue the
following command:
TYPE:
ATSn=r
Where:
n is the register number, and
r is the new value
PRESS:
Enter
In Table 13-2, the value for n is listed in the S-register
column, and the value for r is listed in the Description
column.
Table 13-2
(1 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
S0
Auto-Answer Ring Number
Register determines number of rings the modem will count before
automatically answering a call.
Enter zero (0) if you do not want the modem to automatically answer any
calls. Otherwise, enter a value from 1–255 for the number of rings to count
before answering.
Factory setting is 1.
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
S2
AT Escape Character
Register determines ASCII value used for escape sequence to enter
Command mode from Data mode.
Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the escape character. Any value greater
than 127 causes the modem to disable the escape sequence. When the
escape sequence is disabled, the modem cannot return to Command
mode until the call is disconnected.
Factory setting is 43 (+ key).
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
S3
Carriage Return Character
Register determines ASCII value used as the carriage return (Return key).
This character is used to end command lines and result codes.
Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the command end character.
Factory setting is 13 (carriage return key).
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
NOTE: The &W command used to save this change must be on a
separate line. This ensures both that the change is intentional,
and that the DTE can enter the new character.
13-14
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-2
(2 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
S4
Line Feed Character
Register determines ASCII value used as the line feed character.
Enter a value from 0–127 for the line feed character.
Factory setting is 10 (ASCII carriage return or line feed).
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
S5
Backspace Character
Register determines ASCII value used as the backspace (Backspace key).
This character moves the cursor to the left and erases the previous
character.
Enter a value from 0–127.
Factory setting is 08 (backspace key).
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
S6
Blind Dial Pause
Register determines how long (in seconds) the modem waits after going
off-hook before dialing a telephone number if using result code X0, X1, or
X3.
Enter a value from 2–255 seconds.
Factory setting is 2 seconds.
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
S7
No Answer Timeout
Register determines how long (in seconds) an originating modem waits
before abandoning a call when no answer tone is received.
Enter a value from 1–255 seconds.
Factory setting is 45 seconds.
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
S8
‘‘,” Pause Time for the Dial Modifier
Register determines how long (in seconds) the modem pauses when it
encounters a comma (,) in the Dial command string.
Enter a value from 0–255 seconds.
Factory setting is 2 seconds.
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
S10
No Carrier Disconnect
Configure\Edit\
Register determines how long (in tenths of seconds) the modem allows the Line Dialer
carrier signal to be off before disconnecting the call.
Enter a value from 0–254 in 0.1 second increments. (A value of 255
disables this register.)
Factory setting is 20 (2 seconds).
S12
Escape Guard Time
Register sets the value (in 20-millisecond increments) for the required
pause before and after the escape sequence is issued. The guard time
prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence
characters.
Enter a value from 0–255 in 20-millisecond increments. For example, the
factory setting of 50 equals 1000 milliseconds or one second.
Factory setting is 50 (1 second).
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
13-15
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-2
(3 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
S14
Asymmetric Rate Mode
Register determines whether VF rates for transmitting and receiving are
identical when using V.34 modulation. Enabling the function permits the
two rates to be different.
Register has the following values:
0=Enable
1=Disable
Factory setting is Enable.
Configure\Edit\
Dial Line
S18
Test Timeout
Register sets the duration (in seconds) for the modem tests. This
automatically cancels any test in progress after the time of this register
expires. Any test can be manually canceled by issuing the escape
sequence (+++) followed by the &T0 command.
Enter a value from 0–255 seconds. (A value of 0 disables this register.)
Factory setting is Disable (0).
Configure\Edit\
Tests
S26
RTS-to-CTS Delay
Register sets the length of time (in 10-millisecond increments) the modem
waits after receiving RTS before issuing CTS to the DTE.
Enter a value from 0–255.
Factory setting is 0 milliseconds.
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
S36
Rate Auto Originate
Initiates a dial backup call, using the phone number or numbers
determined by S-register S37 when the leased-line rate of the modem falls
back to or below a certain speed.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=On fallback to 4,800
2=On fallback to 7,200
3=On fallback to 9,600
4=On fallback to 12,000
5=On fallback to 14,400
6=On fallback to 16,800
NOTE: Rate Auto-Originate is valid only when V.32bis Autorate is
enabled (S76=0) and when running V.32bis modulation.
Configure\Edit\
Leased Line
13-16
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-2
(4 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
S37
Description
Auto Redial
Auto Redial allows repeated automatic dial backup attempts by specifying
the range of Directory Locations that can be tried. A redial attempt is made
in response to a bad phone number, a busy signal, no answer, or no quiet
answer. The modem must be in Originate mode.
On leased lines with dial backup, Auto Redial works in conjunction with the
Bad Lines Auto Originate and Rate Auto Originate options.
When DTE Dialer Type is DTR=Dirs, Auto Redial works in conjunction with
the DTR Cont Repeat (S38) configuration option.
Register has the following values:
0= Directory Location 1
1= Directory Locations 1–2
2= Directory Locations 1–3
3= Directory Locations 1–4
S
S
S
S
9= Directory Locations 1–10
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Edit\
Leased Line (Auto
Redial)
or
Configure\Edit\
Line_Dialer (DTR Auto
Redial)
NOTE: The modem must be in Originate mode to perform an automatic
dial backup.
S38
DTR Cont Repeat
Determines whether automatic dialing of dial backup directory locations
will be repeated continuously, or halted after the first pass.
Regardless of the setting of S38, dialing is locked out after ten failed
attempts to connect to the same number.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Factory setting is Disable.
S39
Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay
Configure\Edit\
Determines the maximum amount of time the modem can continue to send V42/MNP/Buffer
data in its Receive Buffer to the DTE after the modem is commanded by
the DTE to disconnect, or after the modem detects a line disconnect.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable (Immediate disconnect)
1=1 second
2=2 seconds
S
S
S
S
255=255 seconds
Factory setting is Disable (0).
S40
Auto Make Busy
Register determines if the modem goes off-hook under certain conditions.
This register should only be enabled when the modem is located behind a
user’s Private Branch Exchange (PBX).
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Factory setting is Disable.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Configure\Edit\
DTE_Dialer
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
13-17
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-2
(5 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
S41
Dial-Line Rate
Register determines the modem’s data rate and modulation scheme for
operation on dial lines.
Register has the following values:
1=14,400 (V.32bis)
2=12,000 (V.32bis)
3=9600 (V.32bis/V32)
4=7200 (V.32bis)
5=4800 (V.32bis/V.32)
6=2400 (V.22bis)
7=1200 (V.22)
8=1200 (212A)
10=0–300 (V21)
11=0–300 (103J)
20=19,200 (V.32terbo)
21=16,800 (V.32terbo)
27=33,600 (V.34 proprietary extension)
28=31,200 (V.34 proprietary extension)
29=28,800 (V.34)
30=26,400 ( V.34)
31=24,000 ( V.34)
32=21,600 (V.34)
33=19,200 (V.34)
34=16,800 (V.34)
35=14,400 (V.34)
36=12,000 (V.34)
37=9600 (V.34)
38=7200 (V.34)
39=4800 (V.34)
40=2400 (V.34)
Factory setting is 28,800 (V.34).
Configure\Edit\
Dial Line
S43
Train Time
Register controls the modem’s train time for V.34, V.32terbo, V.32bis, and
V.32 mode.
Register has the following values:
0=Long
1=Short
Factory setting is Long.
Configure\Edit\
Dial Line
13-18
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-2
(6 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
S44
Leased-Line Rate
Register determines the modem’s data rate and modulation scheme for
operation on either 2-wire or 4-wire leased lines in either Answer or
Originate mode.
Register has the following values:
0, 1=14,400 (V.32bis)
2=12,000 (V.32bis)
3=9600 (V.32bis)
4=7200 (V.32bis)
5=4800 (V.32bis)
6=2400 (V.22bis)
11=14,400 (V.33)
12=12,000 (V.33)
13 =9600 (V.29)
14=7200 (V.29)
15=4800 (V.29)
18=19,200 (V.32terbo)
19=16,800 (V.32terbo)
25=33,600 (V.34 proprietary extension)
26=31,200 (V.34 proprietary extension)
27=28,800 (V.34)
28=26,400 (V.34)
29=24,000 (V.34)
30=21,600 (V.34)
31=19,200 (V.34)
32=16,800 (V.34)
33=14,400 (V.34)
34=12,000 (V.34)
35=9600 (V.34)
36=7200 ( V.34)
37=4800 (V.34)
38=2400 (V.34)
Factory setting is 28,800 (V.34).
Configure\Edit\
Leased Line
S45
Leased TX Level
Register determines the modem’s transmit power output level over leased
lines.
Enter a value from 0–15 dBm.
Factory setting is 0 dBm.
Configure\Edit\
Leased Line
S46
Bad Lines Auto Originate
Register determines if the modem performs an automatic dial backup if the
leased lines fail.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=30 seconds
2=20 seconds
3=60 seconds
4=90 seconds
5=120 seconds
S
S
S
S
21=600 seconds
Factory setting is Disable. Note that the S46=2 command has an effect
that is out of sequence with the other values.
Configure\Edit\
Leased Line
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
13-19
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-2
(7 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
S47
Auto Dial Standby
Register determines if the modem performs an automatic dial standby if in
Dial Backup mode.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=15 minutes
2=1 hour
3=4 hours
255=Test(2min)
Factory setting is Disable.
Configure\Edit\
Leased Line
S48
Leased-Line Carrier On Level
Register determines if the modem disconnects if the carrier signal on
leased lines falls below –26 dBm or – 43 dBm.
Register has the following values:
0= – 43 dBm
1= – 26 dBm
Factory setting is – 43 dBm.
Configure\Edit\
Leased Line
S49
Transmit Buffer Disconnect Delay
Configure\Edit\
Determines the maximum amount of time the modem can continue to send V42/MNP/Buffer
data in its Transmit Buffer to the remote modem after it is commanded by
the DTE to disconnect.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable (Immediate disconnect)
1=1 second
2=2 seconds
S
S
S
S
255=255 seconds
Factory setting is 10 seconds.
S51
DTE RL (CT140)
Register determines if the modem performs a remote digital loopback if it
receives a CT140 signal from the DTE.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Factory setting is Disable.
Configure\Edit\Tests
S52
DTE LL (CT141)
Register determines if the modem performs a local analog loopback if it
receives a CT141 signal from the DTE.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Factory setting is Disable.
Configure\Edit\Tests
13-20
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-2
(8 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
Description
Front Panel Branch
S53
V.54 Address
Identifies the address of the modem to be placed in a loopback test.
Register has the following values:
0 =Disable
1–34 =Modem address
Factory setting is Disable.
Configure\Edit\Tests
S54
V.54 Device Type
Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network.
Register has the following values:
0=Peripheral
1=Intermediate
Factory setting is Peripheral.
Configure\Edit\Tests
S55
Access from Remote
Register determines if a modem’s DCP can be accessed by a remote
modem.
Register has the following values:
0=Enable
1=Disable
The factory default templates do not affect S55.
Configure\Edit\Misc
S56
Remote Access Password (Part 1)
Register allows entry of the first pair (leftmost) of digits of a remote access
password. Any value from 00 to 99 is valid. For example, if the remote
access password is 12345678, then S56=12.
Configure\Edit\Misc
S57
Remote Access Password (Part 2)
Register allows entry of the second pair of digits of a remote access
password. Any value from 00 to 99 is valid.
Configure\Edit\Misc
S58
Remote Access Password (Part 3)
Register allows entry of the third pair of digits of a remote access
password. Any value from 00 to 99 is valid.
Configure\Edit\Misc
S59
Remote Access Password (Part 4)
Register allows entry of the fourth pair (rightmost) of digits of a remote
access password. Any value from 00 to 99 is valid.
Configure\Edit\Misc
S61
CT111 Rate Control
Register determines if CT111 Rate is disabled, set for Fallback 1 or
Fallback 2. CT111 Rate allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23
of the EIA-232-D interface. This configuration option determines the effect
of the DTE Rate Control signal. It is only valid in Async Direct mode and
Synchronous mode. For proper operation, disable the V32bis Autorate and
V32bis Automode configuration options.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Fallback 1
2=Fallback 2
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
Factory setting is Disable.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
13-21
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-2
(9 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
S62
Description
V.25bis Coding
Register identifies to the modem the type of coding used by the DTE while
in V.25bis mode.
Register has the following values:
0=ASCII
1=EBCDIC
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
Factory setting is ASCII.
S63
V.25bis Idle Character
Register identifies to the modem the type of idle fill used by the DTE while
in V.25bis mode.
Register has the following values:
0=Mark
1=Flag
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
Factory setting is Mark.
S64
V.25bis New Line Character
Register identifies to the modem the type of line terminator used by the
DTE while in V.25bis mode.
Register has the following values:
0=Carriage Return and Line Feed
1=Carriage Return
2=Line Feed
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
Factory setting is carriage return and line feed (CR + LF).
S66
NMS Call Messages
Register determines if the modem sends information regarding status (Call
Progress) and/or sends summarized call statistics (Call Connect) to the
dial network management system (COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS).
Register has the following values:
0=Call Connect & Progress
1=Disable
2=Call Connect Only
3=Call Progress Only
Configure\Edit\Misc
The factory default templates do not affect S66.
S67
Directory Location 1 Callback
Register determines if the modem uses the single number callback
function.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Configure\Edit\Misc
Factory setting is Disable.
S69
Make Busy Via DTR
Register determines if the modem goes off-hook (busy) when DTR is Off.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Factory setting is Disable.
13-22
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-2
(10 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
S74
Description
Network Position Identification
Register identifies each modem as either a control or tributary modem.
Register has the following values:
0=Tributary
1=Control
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Edit\Misc
Factory setting is Tributary for the 3810Plus and the 3820Plus.
Factory setting is Control for the 3811Plus.
S75
Network Management Address
Register determines the modem’s network address. This address is used
when accessing the modem from the NMS.
Enter a value from 0 (network address 001) to 255 (network address 256).
The factory default templates do not affect S75.
Configure\Edit\Dial
S76
Autorate (Dial Line)
Register determines if Autorating is used on dial lines when connected in
V.32bis or V.34 mode.
Register has the following values:
0=Enable
1=Disable
2=Start at 4800 bps
3=Start at 9600 bps
Configure\Edit\
Dial Line
Factory setting is Enable.
S77
DTR Alarm Reporting
Register determines whether an alarm is sent to the NMS controller when
the DTR signal has been off for more than 10 seconds.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Configure\Edit\Misc
The factory default templates do not affect S77.
S78
Automode (Dial Line)
Register allows the modem (when operating on dial lines) to automatically
detect and connect to the remote modem’s modulation scheme.
If the modem is in a modem pool attached to a System 85 Private Branch
Exchange (PBX), S78 should be set to 2. This modifies parameters used
during connection to the PBX.
Register has the following values:
0=Enable
1=Disable
2=System 85
Configure\Edit\
Dial Line
Factory setting is Enable.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
13-23
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-2
(11 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
S80
Description
No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal
Register determines whether Pin 2 (transmit data) or Pin 3 (receive data)
of the modem’s RS-232 serial interface is monitored so that the modem
can disconnect the call if there is no activity for a certain period. (See the
\T command.)
Register has the following values:
0=Transmit or Receive
1=Transmit only
2=Receive only
3=Transmit and Receive
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Factory setting is 3.
S82
Autorate (Leased Line)
Register determines if Autorating is used on leased lines when connected
in V.32bis or V.34 mode.
Register has the following values:
0=Enable
1=Disable
Configure\Edit
Leased Line
Factory setting is Enable.
S83
MI/MIC Dialing
On Model 3811Plus only, register determines if MI/MIC control leads can
be used to force the modem into the originate handshake after first dialing
a call.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Factory setting is Disable.
S84
AT Command Mode
Register determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid
AT commands.
Register has the following values:
0=Normal
1=No ERROR
2=No Strap or ERROR
Configure\Edit\
DTE Dialer
Factory setting is Normal.
S85
Fast Disconnect
Register allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a
disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic control panel.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Configure\Edit\
Line Dialer
Factory setting is Disable.
13-24
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
AT Command Set and S-Registers
Table 13-2
(12 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
S88
Description
Straps When Disconnected
Register determines whether the Active(Operating) area is reloaded upon
a disconnect.
Register has the following values:
0 (or 231)=No Change
1 (or 232)=Reload
2 (or 233)=Reload with no AT Change
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Edit\Misc
The factory default templates do not affect S88.
S89
V.42 ARQ Window Size Increase
Register allows the V.42 Automatic Request for Transmission (ARQ)
window size to be set to a value from 6 to 15 frames to accommodate
satellite delays.
Register has the following values:
0=6 frames (default)
1=7 frames
2=8 frames
3=9 frames
S
S
S
S
9=15 frames
None
This command applies only to connections made using V.42bis data
compression or V.42 error control.
Factory setting is 6 frames.
S90
DTE Rate=VF Rate
Register forces the DTE (computer) data rate to be equal to the VF
(telephone line) data rate.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Configure\Edit\
DTE Interface
Factory setting is Disable.
S91
Cellular Enhancements
Register determines whether parameters are set to improve performance
over a cellular link. Should be enabled when the remote modem is using a
cellular connection.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Configure\Edit\
V42/MNP/Buffer
Factory setting is Disable.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
13-25
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table 13-2
(13 of 13)
3800Plus S-Registers
AT Command
S92
Description
V.29 Train On Data
Register determines whether the modem must receive a standard V.29
training sequence in order to enter data mode (Disable) or whether it
should use the received data mode for training (Enable). Effective only if
the V.29 feature is installed and V.29 is selected for the leased-line rate.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Front Panel Branch
Configure\Edit
Leased Line
Factory setting is Disable.
S93
RJ11 Cellular Adapt
Register controls support for an RJ11 connection, including generation of
the ETC 1.1 Calling Tone during call origination.
Register has the following values:
0=Disable
1=Enable
Configure\Edit\Misc
Factory setting is Disable.
13-26
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Menu Tree
A
Overview
The following pages hold graphic representations of
the general menu structure of the front panel or SDCP
displays. The model, installed features, and configuration
options all may affect what is actually displayed at each
level of the menus.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
A-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
A-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Menu Tree
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
A-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
A-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Result Codes
B
Overview
Table B-1 lists all the result codes 3800Plus modems
may send to the DTE. Result codes can be numeric or
verbal, terse or extended. See the Qn, Vn, and
Xn commands in Chapter 13 for more information.
Table B-1
(1 of 3)
Result Codes
Numbers (1)
Numbers (2)
0
0
OK
Command executed
1
1
CONNECT
Modem connected to line
2
2
RING
Modem receiving a ring voltage from the VF line
3
3
NO CARRIER
Modem lost or does not detect carrier signal, or
does not detect answer tone
4
4
ERROR
Invalid command
5
5
CONNECT 1200*
Connection at 1200 bps
6
6
NO DIALTONE*
No dial tone detected
7
7
BUSY*
Busy or trunk busy signal detected
8
8
NO ANSWER*
No ‘‘quiet” answer (@)
10
10
CONNECT 2400*
Connection at 2400 bps
11
11
CONNECT 4800*
Connection at 4800 bps
12
12
CONNECT 9600*
Connection at 9600 bps
13
16
CONNECT 12000*
Connection at 12,000 bps
14
13
CONNECT 14400*
Connection at 14,400 bps
15
14
CONNECT 19200**
Connection at 19,200 bps
16
15
CONNECT 7200*
Connection at 7200 bps
Word
Description
*Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled.
**Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use_DTE_Rate. This displays the DTE data
rate instead of the line rate.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
B-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table B-1
(2 of 3)
Result Codes
Numbers (1)
Numbers (2)
Word
Description
17
17
CONNECT 16800*
Connection at 16,800 bps
19
1
CONNECT 300*
Connection at 300 bps
20
10
CONNECT 2400/ EC***
Connection at 2400 bps with error control
21
11
CONNECT 4800/ EC***
Connection at 4800 bps with error control
22
12
CONNECT 9600/ EC***
Connection at 9600 bps with error control
23
16
CONNECT 12000/ EC***
Connection at 12,000 bps with error control
24
13
CONNECT 14400/ EC***
Connection at 14,400 bps with error control
25
17
CONNECT 16800/ EC***
Connection at 16,800 bps with error control
26
15
CONNECT 7200/ EC***
Connection at 7200 bps with error control
27
5
CONNECT 1200/ EC**
Connection at 1200 bps with error control
28
28
CONNECT 38400**
Connection at 38,400 bps
29
14
CONNECT 19200/ EC***
Connection at 19,200 bps with error control
30
30
CONNECT 57600**
Connection at 57,600 bps
32
32
CONNECT 76800**
Connection at 76,800 bps
34
34
CONNECT 115200**
Connection at 115,200 bps
37
37
CONNECT 21600*
Connection at 21,600 bps
38
38
CONNECT 24000*
Connection at 24,000 bps
39
39
CONNECT 26400*
Connection at 26,400 bps
40
40
CONNECT 28800*
Connection at 28,800 bps
41
41
CONNECT 31200*
Connection at 31,200 bps
42
42
CONNECT 33600*
Connection at 33,600 bps
*Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled.
**Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use_DTE_Rate. This displays the DTE data
rate instead of the line rate.
*** Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add/EC. If this configuration option is set for
Add/V42,MNP, then V42b, V42, MNP5, MNP4, MNP3, MNP2, or NoEC appears. For either suffix type, if the
modulation is V.34, /RX=xxxxx/TX=xxxxx is appended showing the VF rates in both directions.
B-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Result Codes
Table B-1
(3 of 3)
Result Codes
Numbers (1)
Numbers (2)
Word
Description
43
43
CONNECT 21600/ EC***
Connection at 21,600 bps with error control
44
44
CONNECT 24000/ EC***
Connection at 24,000 bps with error control
45
45
CONNECT 26400/ EC***
Connection at 26,400 bps with error control
46
46
CONNECT 28800/ EC***
Connection at 28,800 bps with error control
47
47
CONNECT 31200/ EC***
Connection at 31,200 bps with error control
48
48
CONNECT 33600/ EC***
Connection at 33,600 bps with error control
*** Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add/EC. If this configuration option is set for
Add/V42,MNP, then V42b, V42, MNP5, MNP4, MNP3, MNP2, or NoEC appears. For either suffix type, if the
modulation is V.34, /RX=xxxxx/TX=xxxxx is appended showing the VF rates in both directions.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
B-3
Troubleshooting
C
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Overview
Appendix B points out basic problems that can occur
when operating a 3800Plus modem. Use Tables C-1
through C-6 to check out these problems. If you are
having data communication difficulties, such as periodic
character loss, random errors, or constant format errors,
use the loopback tests described in Chapter 7, Test
Branch. With these tests you can usually isolate the fault
in your system by using the process of elimination. If
problems continue to occur, contact your service
representative.
Table C-1
Modem Integrity
Action
Symptom
Modem did not pass power-up self-test
Contact your service representative.
Power LED does not light
Make sure the modem’s ON/Off switch is in the ON position.
LCD does not display
Make sure the ac power transformer is connected to the ac power receptacle.
If Power LED and/or LCD do not operate, contact your service representative.
A problem is suspected after the
power-up self-test
Perform a self-test via the modem’s DCP or type AT&T9 if using AT
commands.
Perform a local analog loopback with a Pattern test. If the modem consistently
registers errors, contact your service representative.
If the modem passes the above tests and a problem still exists, then the
problem is likely not with your modem.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
C-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table C-2
Modem – DTE Connection
Symptom
Modem does not accept or echo back
AT commands
Action
Verify that the cable between the Async port of the DTE and the modem is a
standard RS-232 cable. If the cable is bad, replace it. (Null modem cables,
also known as crossover cables, do not work in this application.)
Verify that the Command Echo Character configuration option is enabled.
Refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 8, Configure Branch, or ATE command in
Chapter 13, AT Commands and S-Registers.
Verify that the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT. Refer to DTE
Dialer in Chapter 8, or the AT&M or AT&Q command in Chapter 13.
Verify that the Result Codes configuration option is enabled. Refer to DTE
Dialer in Chapter 8, or the ATQ command in Chapter 13.
Reload the Async Dial factory configuration area to guarantee that all
configuration options are returned to their proper setting.
Make sure that all AT commands are terminated with a carriage return.
Verify that the ASCII value of a carriage return matches what is used by the
DTE and the modem. Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 8 or the S3 register in
Chapter 13. Verify that the DTE has a valid character format. Valid format
consists of 8 data bits with no parity or 7 data bits with even, odd, mark or
space parity.
Verify that your equipment can support the DTE data rate. Refer to Async
DTE Rate configuration option, DTE Interface in Chapter 8.
If using a PC, verify that the modem is attached to the correct
communications port.
Table C-3
(1 of 2)
Modem – VF Connection
Action
Symptom
Modem does not receive a dial tone
Attach the telephone directly to the wall outlet to verify that a dial tone exists.
Make sure the VF line is connected to the modem’s rear jack labeled Dial.
Modem does not go off-hook and answer
an incoming call
Verify that the Auto-Answer Ring Count configuration option (S-Register 0) is
set to a value other than 0 (disable).
Verify that the DTE is providing DTR to the modem.
If the DTE does not provide DTR to the modem, verify that the modem’s DTR
Action configuration option is set for Ignore. Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 8.
Verify that all cables are attached to the correct connectors on the rear of the
modem.
C-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Troubleshooting
Table C-3
(2 of 2)
Modem – VF Connection
Symptom
Action
Modem goes off-hook, answers, but does
not connect
Perform a Local Analog Loopback test and verify that data entered at the DTE
is echoed back to the DTE.
Verify that the originating modem is compatible.
Verify that originating modem recognizes your modem’s answer tone.
Verify that originating modem supports your modem’s modulation schemes.
The 3800Plus modem recognizes CCITT V.34, V.32terbo, V.32bis, V.32,
V.22bis, V.22, V.21, Bell 212A, and Bell 103J. It does not support other
vendors’ proprietary modulation schemes.
Force your modem to operate at the same modulation scheme as the
originating modem to see if they connect.
Originate Mode
Verify that the modem’s DTE Dialer configuration option is set to the correct
setting: either AT, DTR Dialing, V.25bis Async, V.25bis Bisync, or V.25bis
HDLC.
Modem does not go off-hook and begin
dialing
If using AT Dialing, refer to Table C-2, Modem – DTE Connection.
If using DTR Dialing, verify the telephone number stored in directory
location 1, and verify that the DTE is raising DTR from Off to ON to initiate a
dial.
If using V.25bis Async, verify that the correct character format is set to 7 data
bits with even parity and 1 stop bit, and the carriage return and line feed are
used as command terminators.
If using V.25bis Bisync, verify that the correct character format uses two
synchronous control characters and a start-of-text control character before
the text block and an end-of-text control character after the text block.
If using V.25bis HDLC, verify that the correct character format uses flag,
address, and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence
check and flag after the text block.
Modem dials but does not connect
If the modem is operating behind a PBX, verify if a 9 and comma are needed
before the telephone number.
Verify whether Tone or Pulse dialing is needed.
Verify if one modem is configured for Error Control or Disconnect and the
other modem is configured for no Error Control. Try calling in Buffer mode.
If both modems use V.32bis or V.32 modulation, set the modem’s V.32bis
Train configuration option to Long.
Intermittent disconnects, high error rates,
or excessive retransmissions
Perform an End-to-End test. Refer to Pattern located in Chapter 7, Test
Branch.
Modem establishes and disconnects a
call
You may have a poor VF connection. Disconnect and dial again.
The remote modem may have encountered an EC Disconnect, where the
modem is configured to establish a call using error correction. If the modems
cannot negotiate EC, then a disconnect occurs.
The remote modem may be in a forced Error Control mode (disconnect if
there is no error control). Reconfigure your modem to V.42/MNP or Buffer and
try again.
Check the LCD to verify the reason for disconnect.
Perform a Local Analog Loopback test.
High error rates occur when running a
local loopback or self-test
3980-A2-GB30-20
Incoming rings can cause data errors during a loopback test. Abort the test,
disconnect the modular VF cord, and restart the test.
November 1996
C-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table C-4
Online Operation
Symptom
Action
Data scrambled
Verify that the character format (data bits, parity, and stop bits) is set to the
same value in both modems.
Missing data during a transfer
Verify that you are using the same method of flow control for both the modem
and the DTE.
If using XON/XOFF flow control, verify that the modem’s parity matches the
DTE’s parity.
Table C-5
Leased-Line Operation
Symptom
Modems do not train-up on leased lines
Action
Verify that the correct cabling is used for your application. Refer to Chapter 2,
Installation.
Verify that one modem is configured for Answer mode and the other is
configured for Originate mode.
Verify that both modems are using the same modulation scheme.
Verify that modems are configured for the appropriate leased-line mode. For
example, if you have a 4-wire leased line, then the modems must be
configured for 4-wire operation.
Modems are configured for dial backup,
but do not switch to dial lines if leased
lines fail
Verify that both modems have the Auto Dial Backup configuration option
enabled.
Table C-6
Dial Backup Operation
Symptom
Dial backup line is present, but cannot
connect
Action
Verify that the correct telephone number for the remote modem is stored in
directory location 1.
Verify that one modem has the Auto Dial Backup configuration option set for
Disable and the other has it set to Enable.
Modem does not switch back to
leased-line operation
C-4
Verify that the Auto Dial Standby configuration option is enabled.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Technical Specifications
D
Table D-1 shows the technical specifications for
3800Plus modems.
Table D-1
(1 of 3)
Technical Specifications for COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Criteria
Specifications
APPROVALS (110 Vac, 60 Hz only)
FCC Part 15
Class A
FCC Part 68
Registration Number: (See label on modem.)
UL
3810Plus (Model 3980)
3820Plus (Model 3982)
Listed to UL 1950
3811Plus (Model 3981)
Recognized to UL 1950 with COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier
CSA
3810Plus (Model 3980)
3820Plus (Model 3982)
3811Plus (Model 3981)
Certified to CSA C22.2 No. 950-M89
Certified as a component to CSA C22.2 No. 950-M89 with
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier
DOC
3810Plus (Model 3980)
3811Plus (Model 3981)
3820Plus (Model 3982)
3980-A2-GB30-20
Certification Number: (See label on modem.)
November 1996
D-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table D-1
(2 of 3)
Technical Specifications for COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Specifications
COMPATIBILITY
Criteria
DIAL-LINE MODULATIONS
Proprietary V.34 (33,600, 31,200 bps)
ITU-T V.34 (28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800,
14,400,12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps)
V.32terbo (19,200, 16,800 bps)
CCITT V.32bis (14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps)
CCITT V.32 (9600, 4800 bps)
CCITT V.22bis (2400 bps)
CCITT V.22 (1200 bps)
CCITT V.21 (300 bps)
Bell 212A (1200 bps)
Bell 103J (300 bps)
LEASED-LINE MODULATIONS
Proprietary V.34 (33,600, 31,200 bps)
ITU-T V.34 (28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800, 14,400,
12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps)
V.32terbo (19,200, 16,800 bps)
V.32bis (14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps)
V.32 (9600, 4800 bps)
V.33 (14,400, 12,000 bps) (optional)
V.29 (9600, 7200, 4800 bps) (optional)
V.22bis (2400 bps)
FAX MODULATIONS
CCITT V.17 (14,400 bps)
CCITT V.29 (9600, 7200 bps)
CCITT V.27 ter (4800, 2400 bps)
DATA RATES
Dial Line
33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200,16,800,
14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400, 1200, or 300–0 bps
Leased Line
33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200,16,800,
14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, or 2400 bps
DTE RATES
115,200, 76,800, 57,600, 38,400, 28,800, 14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200,
4800, 2400, 1200, 0–300 bps
ERROR CONTROL
CCITT V.42
MNP 4–2
DATA COMPRESSION
CCITT V.42bis
MNP Class 5
ENVIRONMENT
Operating Temperature
32°F (0°C) to 122°F (50°C)
Relative Humidity
5% to 90% (noncondensing)
Shock and Vibration
Withstands normal shipping
Storage Temperature
– 4°F (–20°C) to 158°F (70°C)
D-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Technical Specifications
Table D-1
(3 of 3)
Technical Specifications for COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Specifications
Criteria
AC POWER REQUIREMENTS
3810Plus and 3820Plus
110 Vac, 50 to 60 Hz
POWER CONSUMPTION
3810Plus and 3820Plus
8 watts (typical, including power supply, speaker off)
3811Plus
6 watts (typical, each card)
Speaker consumption is approximately 1 watt at high volume.
HEAT DISSIPATION
3810Plus and 3820Plus
27.3 BTU/Hr (typical, including power supply, speaker off)
3811Plus
20.5 BTU/Hr (typical, each card)
DIMENSIONS
Weight
2.5 pounds (1.14 kg) 3810Plus and 3820Plus (without power supply)
1.0 pounds (0.45 kg) 3811Plus
Height
2.1 inches (5.4 cm) 3810Plus and 3820Plus
7.1 inches (18.1 cm) 3811Plus
Width
7.6 inches (19.4 cm) 3810Plus and 3820Plus
1.8 inches (4.6 cm) 3811Plus
Depth
12.1 inches (30.8 cm) 3810Plus and 3820Plus
13.4 inches (34.0 cm) 3811Plus
TRANSMIT LEVEL
Dial Line
Permissive (–9 dBm), Selectable –32 dBm through –10 dBm,
ETC 1.0, ETC 1.1
Leased Line
0 through –15 dBm (in 1 dBm decrements)
TELEPHONE INTERFACE
Dial-Line Connectivity
3810Plus and 3820Plus
RJ11C Permissive
3811Plus
RJ21X Permissive 50-pin connector
RJ11C Permissive Service Line
Leased-Line Connectivity
3810Plus
JM8
3820Plus
JM8 using JM8 to RJ11 Crossover Cable (see Appendix E)
3811Plus
50-pin mass termination
DTE INTERFACE
25-pin D-subminiature connector
EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24
VOICE FREQUENCY LINE REQUIREMENTS
2-wire dial (PSTN) or 4-wire/2-wire leased line
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
D-3
Pin Assignments
E
EIA-232-D Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
VF Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
JM8 to RJ11 Crossover Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Appendix E lists the pin assignments for EIA-232-D
and VF TELCO interfaces, and shows the wiring diagram
for an 8-position to 6-position cable.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
E-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
EIA-232-D Pin Assignments
Table E-1 lists the EIA-232-D pin assignments for the
modem.
Table E-1
EIA-232-D Pin Assignments
RS-232 Pin
Name
EIA
Circuit
CCITT
Signal
Source
1
—
AA
101
—
2
TXD
BA
103
DTE
Transmit Data
3
RXD
BB
104
DCE
Receive Data
4
RTS
CA
105
DTE
Request-to-Send
5
CTS
CB
106
DCE
Clear-to-Send
6
DSR
CC
107
DCE
Data Set Ready
7
SG
AB
102
—
8
LSD
CF
109
DCE
9
+10V
—
—
—
Reserved for test purposes (may be used to drive
one RS-232 load)
10
–10V
—
—
—
Reserved for test purposes (may be used to drive
one RS-232 load)
11
—
—
—
—
Unassigned
12
CT112
CI
112
DCE
13
—
—
—
—
Reserved for future function
14
—
—
—
—
Reserved for future function
15
TXC
DB
114
DCE
16
—
—
—
—
17
RXC
DD
115
DCE
Receive Clock
18
CT141
LL
141
DTE
Local Loopback
20
DTR
CD
108
DTE
Data Terminal Ready
21
CT140
RL
140
DTE
Remote Loopback
22
RI
CE
125
DCE
Ring Indicator
23
CT111
CH
111
DTE
Data Rate Selector
24
XTXC
DA
113
DTE
External Clock
25
TEST
TM
142
DCE
Test Mode
E-2
November 1996
Circuit Function
Shield
Signal Ground
Line Signal Detect
Data Signal Rate Select
Transmit Clock
Reserved for future function
3980-A2-GB30-20
Pin Assignments
VF Connector Pin
Assignments
Table E-2 lists the connector pin assignments for
3810Plus and 3820Plus modular jacks and the pin
assignments for the TELCO jacks (Figure E-1).
Table E-2
VF Connector Pin Assignments
Pin
3810Plus Leased
Dial/
3820Plus
Leased
Type of Telco Jack
RJ11
JM8
1
4-Wire: TX
2-Wire: TX/RX
Ring 1
2
4-Wire: TX
2-Wire: TX/RX
Tip 1
3
4
Ring/
2-Wire
Leased
Ring
5
Tip/
2-wire
Leased
Tip
6
7
4-Wire: RX
Tip
8
4-Wire: RX
Ring
Figure E-1. VF Pin Orientation
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
E-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
JM8 to RJ11 Crossover Cable
For 2-wire leased-line connections to a JM8 network
interface, an 8-position to 6-position crossover cable (see
Figure E-2) must be used according to the following FCC
requirements:
‘‘The RJ series of jacks should not be used for
connecting data equipment to nonswitched private line
networks – specifically, the service equivalents of the
pre-divestiture Series 3002 (Category II, Tariff #260)
service. There is a substantial difference in transmit levels
permitted in the private line service and those permitted in
the public switched network. The industry standard is now
an 8-pin keyed modular jack known as the USOC JM8
(Bellcore Technical Reference: TR-EOP-000242, Issue 1,
released May 1985.) When ordering the installation of the
USOC JM8, specify the appropriate wiring options:
1. 2-wire operations
2. 4-wire operations w/o TEK leads
3. 4-wire operations with TEK leads
TEK leads are for loopback purposes.
A 50-pin version is being considered for multiple line
connections.”
Figure E-2. Wiring Diagram — 8-Position to 6-Position Crossover Cable
E-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
CCITT V.25bis Dialing Commands
and Responses
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Request Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Request with Number Provided (CRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided (CRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Failure Indication (CFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Connecting (CNX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Answer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Call (INC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disregard Incoming Call (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect Incoming Call (CIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Normal (PRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request List of Stored Numbers (RLN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Stored Number Response (LSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valid (VAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invalid (INV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview
CCITT V.25bis is an international dialing protocol that
permits direct and stored number dialing using DTEs in
either Asynchronous, Bisynchronous, or HDLC operating
mode. The 3800Plus modems support V.25bis request and
answer commands that initiate and cancel dialing,
program commands that allow you to create and enter
telephone numbers to memory, and list commands that
display all telephone numbers stored in directory
locations. As commands are entered from the DTE,
3800Plus modems issue a response to the DTE which
indicates if the call failed or connected, or if the command
is valid or invalid.
3980-A2-GB30-20
F
F-1
F-2
F-2
F-2
F-2
F-2
F-2
F-3
F-3
F-3
F-3
F-3
F-3
F-3
F-4
F-4
F-4
The following section discusses those V.25bis
commands supported by 3800Plus modems and the
response to those commands.
Tables F-1 and F-2 in the Command Response section
list the V.25bis command and response and the analogous
AT command.
November 1996
NOTE
The 3800Plus modem must be
configured for V.25bis dialing.
Refer to DTE Dialer Type
configuration option in
Chapter 8, Configure Branch.
F-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Call Request Commands
Call Response
Call Request commands are issued from the DTE to
the modem and are responsible for initiating any dial
calls. Call Request commands include Call Request with
Number Provided (CRN) and Call Request with Stored
Memory Address Provided (CRS).
Call Failure Indication (CFI)
Call Request with Number Provided (CRN)
The CFI response is issued to the DTE if the modem
fails a CRN or CRS command. CFI is similar to the AT
result codes BUSY, NO ANSWER, NO CARRIER, NO
DIALTONE, and ERROR.
The CFI response format is:
CFIxx
The CRN command dials the telephone number
entered from the DTE. CRN is similar to the ATD
command.
Where:
ET
NS
CB
RT
AB
NT
FC
The CRN command format is:
CRNn
Where:
n is the dial string. The following
characters are permitted:
T
P
0–9
*#ABCD
R
:
, or <
&
= or >
DTMF Dialing
Pulse Dialing
DTMF Tones or
Pulse Dialed Digits
DTMF Tones
Reverse Dial
Wait for Dial Tone
User-Defined Pause
Flash Hook
Delimiters
NS is similar to the Common Operational Message
Invalid Number and the result code ERROR.
CB is similar to the Call Failure Messages, Dial Line in
Use and No Dial-Test and the result code ERROR.
RT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Answer
Tone and the result code NO CARRIER.
AB is similar to the Call Failure Messages, No Dial
Tone and No Dial-DTR and the result code NO
DIALTONE and ERROR.
The CRS command dials the telephone number stored
in the request directory location. CRS is similar to the
ATDS command.
The CRS command format is:
NT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Quiet
Answer and the result code NO ANSWER.
Call Connecting (CNX)
CRSx
x is directory location 1–10.
The modem responds to the command with either a
VAL (valid) or INV (invalid) response followed by a call
progress report such as connect (CNX) or failure (CFI).
F-2
Engaged tone
Number not stored
Local DCE busy
Timeout on ring tone
Abort call on time-out
Answer tone not detected
Forbidden call
ET is similar to the Call Failure Messages, Busy Signal
and Trunk Busy and the result code BUSY.
Call Request with Stored Memory
Address Provided (CRS)
Where:
xx is one of
The CNX response informs the DTE that the modem
has connected to the remote modem. CNX is similar to the
AT result code CONNECT.
The CNX response format is CNX.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
CCITT V.25bis Dialing Commands and Responses
Call Answer Commands
Program Normal (PRN)
Call Answer commands disable or enable the modem’s
AutoAnswer function. These commands are issued from
the DTE. Call Answer commands include Incoming Call
(INC), Disregard Incoming Call (DIC) and Connect
Incoming Call (CIC).
The Program Normal (PRN) command allows the DTE
to enter and store a telephone number to a specific
directory location. PRN is similar to the AT&Z command.
The PRN command format is:
PRNx;n
Where:
Incoming Call (INC)
The INC response informs the DTE that the modem
has detected a ring tone. At this point, the DTE can issue
the DIC command to disable the modem from answering
the call. INC is similar to the AT result code RING.
Disregard Incoming Call (DIC)
The DIC command prevents the modem from
answering an incoming call. This command is only valid
once the DTE receives an incoming call (INC) response
from the modem. A DIC must be issued within 5 seconds
after receiving an INC.
The DIC command format is DIC.
x is the directory location 1–10.
n is the telephone number.
Request List of Stored
Numbers (RLN)
The Request List of Stored Numbers (RLN) command
displays telephone numbers stored in the modem’s
directory location. If the RLN command is entered
without specifying a directory location, then all directory
locations and telephone numbers are displayed. If a
directory location is entered, then only that telephone
number are displayed.
The RLN command format is:
If DIC is issued within 5 seconds, the modem sends the
VAL response to the DTE. If DIC is issued after
5 seconds, INV is returned.
RLN
which displays all directory locations,
or
Connect Incoming Call (CIC)
RLNx
The CIC command forces the modem to cancel any
DIC commands and answer an incoming call. This
command is only valid when the DTE issues a DIC
command. CIC must be issued within 10 seconds after
sending a DIC. CIC is similar to the ATA command.
Where:
x is a directory location.
List Stored Number
Response (LSN)
The CIC command format is CIC.
If CIC is issued within 10 seconds, the modem sends
the VAL response to the DTE. If CIC is issued after 10
seconds, INV is returned.
LSN is a response to an RLN command issued by the
DTE. If a directory location is specified, then the
telephone number for that location is displayed. If no
directory location is specified, then all telephone numbers
stored in memory are displayed.
The LSN response format is:
LSNx;n
Where:
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
x is the directory location.
n is the telephone number.
F-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Command Response
Invalid (INV)
A Command Response indicates that the command
entered was a valid or invalid entry. Command Response
includes Valid (VAL) and Invalid (INV).
The INV response indicates that the modem has
received an incorrect V.25bis command from the DTE.
INV is similar to the AT result code ERROR.
The INV response format is:
Valid (VAL)
INVxx
The VAL response indicates that the modem has
accepted the V.25bis command issued by the DTE. VAL is
similar to the AT result code OK.
Where:
xx is
CU
MS
PS
PV
command unknown
message syntax error
parameter syntax error
parameter value error
Table F-1 lists V.25bis commands supported by
3800Plus modems.
Table F-1
V.25bis Commands
V.25bis
Command
Description
AT Command/
S-Register Equivalent
CALL REQUEST COMMANDS
CRN
Call Request with Number Provided
ATD
CRS
Call Request with Memory Address
ATDS
CALL ANSWER COMMANDS
INC
Incoming Call Indication
RING
DIC
Disregard Incoming Call
NONE
CIC
Connect Incoming Call
ATA
PROGRAM COMMAND
PRN
Program Normal
AT&Z
LIST REQUEST
RLN
F-4
Request to List Stored Number
November 1996
NONE
3980-A2-GB30-20
CCITT V.25bis Dialing Commands and Responses
Table F-2 lists V.25bis response messages supported by
3800Plus modems.
Table F-2
V.25bis Response Messages
V.25bis
Command
Description
AT Command/
S-Register Equivalent
CALL RESPONSE
CFI
Call Failure Indication
BUSY, NO ANSWER, NO
CARRIER, NO DIAL
TONE, ERROR
CNX
Call Connecting Indication
CONNECT
LIST RESPONSE
LSN
List Stored Number
NONE
COMMAND RESPONSE
VAL
Valid Command
OK
INV
Invalid Command
ERROR
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
F-5
Default Configuration Options
G
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Overview
Table G-1 lists all default configuration options for the
main four factory preset configurations. (Additional
configuration options set by the Cellular (Mobile) and
Cellular (PSTN) factory preset configurations are listed
under the &F5 and &F6 commands in Chapter 13.) An
N/A indicates that the value for this configuration option
does not appear on the LCD if that factory default
configuration is selected.
Table G-1
(1 of 4)
Factory Default Configuration Options
Configuration Option
DTE INTERFACE
Async/Sync Mode
Async DTE Rate
Async # Data Bits
Async Parity Bit
Async # Stop Bits
DTR Action
DSR Control
RTS Action
CTS Control
RTS/CTS Delay
LSD Control
TX Clock Source
CT111 Rate Control
DTE Rate = VF Rate
1 UNIX
Async Dial and UNIX
Dial Default Settings
Async
19,200 bps
8
None
1
Ignore
Forced ON
Ignore
Forced On
Wink When Disc1
0 msec
Standard RS232
Wink When Disc1
N/A
Disable
Disable
Sync Dial
Default Settings
Sync Leased Answer/
Originate Mode
Default Settings
Sync
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Standard RS232
Standard RS232
Standard RS232
Standard RS232
Sync
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Ignore
Standard RS232
Standard RS232
Standard RS232
0 msec
Standard RS232
0 msec
Standard RS232
Internal
Disable
Disable
Internal
Disable
Disable
Dial default setting only.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
G-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table G-1
(2 of 4)
Factory Default Configuration Options
Configuration Option
DTE DIALER
DTE Dialer Type
AT Escape Character
Escape Guard Time
Break Forces Escape
Command Character Echo
Carriage Return Character
Backspace Character
Linefeed Character
Result Codes
Extended Result Codes
Result Codes Format
AT Command Mode 2
V.25bis Coding
V.25bis Idle Fill
V.25bis New Line Character
LINE DIALER
Auto Answer Ring Count
Dialer Type
Dial Tone Detect
Blind Dial Pause
Busy Tone Detect
‘‘,” Pause Time
No Answer Timeout
Fast Disconnect
Long Space Disconnect
No Carrier Disconnect
No Data Disconnect
Auto Make Busy
(3811Plus only)
Make Busy via DTR
MI/MIC Dialing
1 UNIX
2
G-2
Async Dial and UNIX
Dial Default Settings
Sync Dial
Default Settings
Sync Leased Answer/
Originate Mode
Default Settings
AT
043 ASCII
1sec
Disable
Enable
013 ASCII
008 ASCII
010 ASCII
Enable
Enable In Originate1
Enable
Words
Normal
N/A
N/A
N/A
Disable
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Disable
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
Tone
Enable
N/A
Enable
2 sec
45 sec
Disable
Enable
5 sec
60 min
Disable
1
Tone
Enable
N/A
Enable
2 sec
45 sec
Disable
Disable
5 sec
60 min
Disable
1
Tone
Enable
N/A
Enable
2 sec
45 sec
Disable
Enable
5 sec
60 min
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Dial default setting only.
This configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Default Configuration Options
Table G-1
(3 of 4)
Factory Default Configuration Options
Configuration Option
Async Dial and UNIX
Dial Default Settings
Sync Dial
Default Settings
Sync Leased Answer/
Originate Mode
Default Settings
DIAL LINE
Modulation
Dial Line Rate
Automode
Autorate
Dial Transmit Level
V.22bis Guard Tone
Train Time
Asymmetric Rate
V.34
28800(V34)
Enable
Enable
Permissive – 9 dBm
Disable
Long
Enable
V.34
28800(V34)
Enable
Enable
Permissive – 9 dBm
Disable
Long
Enable
V.34
28800(V34)
N/A
Enable
Permissive – 9 dBm
Disable
Long
Enable
LEASED LINE
Leased Mode
N/A
N/A
Modulation
Leased Line Rate
Autorate
Leased Transmit Level
Auto Dial Backup
Auto Dial Standby
Carrier On Level
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4-wire LL Answer 3
4-wire LL Orig 4
V.34
28800(V34)
Enable
0 dBm
Disable
Disable
– 43 dBm
V.42/MNP or Buffer
Enable
Enable
Disable
N/A
CTS to DTE
Disable
N/A
Disable
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Keep Data
Data First
10 seconds
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
V.42/MNP/BUFFER
Error Control Mode
V.42bis Compression
MNP5 Compression
EC Negotiate Buffer
EC Fallback Character
Flow Control of DTE
Flow Control of Modem
XON/XOFF Passthrough
Modem-to-Modem Flow
Control
Break Buffer Control
Send Break Control
Buffer Disconnect Delay
3
Sync Leased Answer Mode default setting.
4
Sync Leased Originate Mode default setting.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
G-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
Table G-1
(4 of 4)
Factory Default Configuration Options
Configuration Option
TESTS
DTE RL (CT140)
DTE LL (CT141)
Test Timeout
Receive Remote Loopback
V.54 Address
V.54 Device Type
MISC
Straps When Disconnect2
Speaker Control
Speaker Volume
Access from Remote 2
Remote Access Password 2
Directory Location Callback
Network Management
Address2
NMS Call Messages2
Network Position
CellulrRJ11Adpt
SECURITY
Entry Wait Time2
VF Prompt Type2
DTE Password Tries2
DTE Password Termination
Character2
Password Backspace
Character2
Answer Security Mode 2
Originate Security Mode 2
2 This
5
G-4
Async Dial and UNIX
Dial Default Settings
Sync Dial
Default Settings
Sync Leased Answer/
Originate Mode
Default Settings
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
N/A
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
N/A
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
N/A
No Change
On Until Carrier
Medium
Enable
00000000
Disable
256
No Change
On Until Carrier
Medium
Enable
00000000
Disable
256
No Change
On Until Carrier
Medium
Enable
00000000
Disable
256
Call Connect & Progress
N/A
Disable
Call Connect & Progress
N/A
Disable
Call Connect & Progress
Tributary Control5
Disable
20 sec
2nd Dial Tone
1
20 sec
2nd Dial Tone
1
20 sec
2nd Dial Tone
1
013 ASCII
013 ASCII
013 ASCII
008 ASCII
No_Answ_Sec
No_OrigSec
008 ASCII
No_Answ_Sec
No_OrigSec
008 ASCII
No_Answ_Sec
No_OrigSec
configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options.
3811Plus default setting.
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Equipment List
Equipment
H
Feature/Part Number
Model 3810Plus (110 v)
3980-A2-201
Model 3811Plus
3981-B1-001
Model 3820Plus (110 v)
3982-A2-201
V.29 Feature
3980-C1-002
V.33 Feature
3980-C1-003
Expanded Security Feature (for 3811Plus modems only)
3980-C1-004
User’s Guide
3980-M1-001
6-position, 4-wire modular cord, 7-foot length
125-0067-0031
8-position, 8-wire modular cord, 14-foot length
125-0053-1431
8-position to 6-position (JM8 to RJ11) crossover modular cable
125-0054-1531
Power Supply
327-0073-0131
3980-A2-GB30-20
(110 v)
November 1996
H-1
Glossary
Active (Operating)
A configuration area containing configuration options currently in use by the modem.
When a power cycle occurs, a reset is performed, or a save is issued using the DCP, this
area is updated with the contents of Active (Saved).
Active (Saved)
A nonvolatile configuration area containing the most recently saved configuration
options. Any changes made to configuration options can be saved using either the DCP’s
Save command or by issuing an AT&W0 command.
analog loop
See local analog loop.
analog signal
A signal, such as a voice, that varies continuously.
Answer mode
The modem is in a state where it is ready to receive an incoming call. For example, an
ATA (Answer) command has been issued to place the modem into online answer mode.
The modem has been forced off-hook and is generating an answer tone, beginning the
handshaking process with the calling modem.
ASCII
This code (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is a 7-bit code which
establishes compatibility between data services. ASCII is the standard for data
transmission over telephone lines. The ASCII code consists of 32 control characters
(nondisplayed) and 96 displayed characters. See Appendix F.
Async Dial
A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used
in asynchronous dial networks.
asynchronous
transmission
A data transmission that is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a
character (five to eight bits) and one or more stop bits at the end.
AT command set
A group of commands, issued from an asynchronous DTE, that allow control of the
modem while in Command mode. All commands must begin with the characters AT and
end with a carriage return.
AT prefix
A prefix issued before every AT command (except A/ and +++) which identifies the
DTE’s data rate, parity, and character length.
autobaud
Modem automatically determines the asynchronous DTE data rate when using
AT commands.
automatic answer
A capability to respond to a call received over a dial line.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Glossary-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
automatic dial backup
When leased-line operation fails, this function forces the modem to dial the telephone
number stored in directory location 1; communication over the dial network continues
with the remote modem. For a 3800Plus modem to perform this properly, the telephone
number in directory location 1 must be the telephone number at the remote site. Also, the
Auto Dial Backup configuration option in one modem must be enabled while the other
modem must have the Auto Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled.
automatic dial standby
When operating in Dial Backup mode, this function forces the modem to periodically
check the quality of the leased line. If the leased line is found to be at normal operating
condition, the modem disconnects from the dial network and continues normal operation
over the leased-line network.
backbone network
The primary route from a control modem to its first tributary when the communications
network contains extended controls.
backplane
A common bus at the rear of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier connecting each
circuit card slot to the SDCP and/or SDU. It also distributes low-voltage ac power to
each slot.
baud
A unit of signaling speed that is equal to the number of symbols per second. This is not
necessarily the same as bits per second, although the terms are frequently interchanged.
bis
Latin for “twice.” Used to distinguish the second version of a standard from other
versions; e.g., V.32bis.
Bisync
Binary Synchronous Communications. An IBMr communications protocol that has
become an industry standard. It uses a defined set of control characters and control
character sequences for synchronized transmission of binary-coded data between stations
in a data communications system.
bit
A contraction of binary digit. A bit, which is the smallest unit of information, represents
the choice between a one or a zero (sometimes called mark or space).
bps
Bits per second. Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data
connection.
buffer
A storage device used to compensate for differences in the data flow rate when
transmitting data from one device to another.
byte
A sequence of successive bits (usually eight) handled as a unit in data transmission.
Call Setup
Top-Level menu branch that contains all the functions necessary to dial telephone
numbers stored in directory locations, answer incoming calls, disconnect calls, and save
telephone numbers to directory locations.
carrier
The rack mounting that contains 17 slots: 1 control slot for an SDU and 16 modem slots.
See data carrier.
carrier-mount
A modem that is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier and
used at central-site operations. Up to 16 modems can be installed per carrier, with
6 carriers per cabinet.
CCITT
An advisory committee (Consultative Committee on International Telephone and
Telegraph) established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards
and policies. Now called ITU-T.
Glossary-2
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Glossary
character
A letter, figure, number, punctuation, or other symbols.
character echo
A way to check the accuracy of data transmission by sending (displaying) all the
characters being transmitted to the monitor.
circuit pack lock
A screw lock tab installed over a circuit card’s latch release tab to prevent the unit from
being removed without a tool. It is used on SDUs, modems, and filler panels.
Class 1 fax
A fax modem standard. Under Class 1 computer software handles most of the protocol,
compression, and conversion tasks.
Class 2 fax
A fax modem standard. Under Class 2 the modem handles most of the protocol,
compression, and conversion tasks as well as modulation, leaving the computer free for
other work.
command line
Contains the command(s) instructing the modem to perform a function. Command lines
begin with the AT prefix (unless disabled), and are executed when you press the Return
key.
Command mode
One of two general modem operating modes. When in Command mode, the modem
accepts commands instead of transmitting or receiving data.
configuration area
One of five areas within the Configure branch containing modem settings. Configuration
areas include Active (Operating), Active (Saved), Customer 1, Customer 2, and Factory.
configuration option
Modem software that sets specific operating parameters for the modem. Sometimes
referred to as straps.
Configure
Top-Level menu branch that contains all the modem’s configuration options.
connector
An outlet on equipment and cables that provides a connection.
CSA
Canadian Standards Association.
CTS
Clear-to-Send. A signal indicating that the modem is ready for the DTE to transmit data.
Customer 1
A user-defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a
specific application.
Customer 2
A user-defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a
specific application.
data bank
An area within the modem used to store the modem’s firmware. 3800Plus modems have
two data banks.
data carrier
A continuous frequency signal that can be modulated by another signal that contains
information to be transmitted.
data compression
The elimination of empty fields, redundancies, and gaps in order to reduce storage
capacity needs and the amount of data to be transmitted. Anything that is eliminated is
restored after the data is received.
Data mode
One of two general modem operating modes. When in Data mode, the modem transmits
and receives data instead of accepting commands.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Glossary-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
DB-25 connector
A 25-pin connector that is used to connect a cable which enables communications
between two devices.
dBm
A decibel referenced to one milliwatt. This unit measures relative signal power.
DCE
The equipment (Data Communications Equipment or Data Circuit Terminating
Equipment) that provides the functions required to establish, maintain, and end a
connection. This equipment also provides the signal conversion required for
communication between the DTE and the telephone line. A modem is a DCE.
DCP
Diagnostic Control Panel. The face of the modem that continuously provides status
information about the modem’s operation and allows an operator to manage its operation.
This is a generic term used for both the standalone and carrier-mounted models. See
SDCP.
demodulation
The process of recovering data from a modulated carrier wave.
dial command modifiers
A modifier used in the dial string that instructs the modem how to process a dialed
telephone number.
dial line
A communications circuit that is established by a switched circuit connection in the dial
network.
dial network
See PSTN.
Dial Standby
A function available when the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode, allowing the
modem to switch back to lease-line operation while still maintaining the dial-line
connection.
dial string
A series of characters that consists of numbers and modifiers used to dial a telephone
number.
digital signal
A signal composed of only two discrete values, representing the binary digits 0 and 1.
directory location
Nonvolatile memory that stores up to ten telephone numbers. Each directory location can
have up to 40 characters entered.
DOC
Canadian Department of Communication.
download
A process that transfers modem firmware from a locally attached PC to a modem or
allows the cloning of firmware from a local modem to a remote modem. Also, the
process of moving data from a host computer to an attached computer.
DTE
The equipment (Data Terminal Equipment), such as a computer or terminal, that
provides data in the form of digital signals.
edit area
A temporary work area used to view and change configuration options from the DCP
without impacting modem operation. The edit area can be loaded from one of five
configuration option areas, Active (Operating), Active (Saved), Customer 1, Customer 2,
or Factory.
EIA
Electronic Industries Association. This organization provides standards for the data
communications industry.
EPROM
Erasable programmable read-only memory.
Glossary-4
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Glossary
error control
An algorithm used to correct data transmission errors.
escape sequence
Default setting is +++. This sequence lets you switch your modem from Data mode to
Command mode.
extended result codes
An asynchronous message (in either numbers or words) that includes VF data rate and
error control information the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to
execute a command.
fax modem
A modem capable of emulating some features of a fax machine. Working under the
control of fax software, a fax modem can communicate with a fax machine or with
another fax modem.
fax software
A program or system of programs installed on a computer that allow a fax modem to
send and receive facsimile images.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission. Board of Commissioners that regulates all
interstate and foreign electrical communication systems that originate from the United
States.
full-duplex
Simultaneous, two-way communications.
function key
One of three keys on the DCP that allows you to select or increment an LCD entry.
Function keys are labeled F1, F2, and F3.
Group III
A fax standard that specifies a rate of transmission of about one page per minute.
half-duplex
Two-way data communications allowed in only one direction at a time.
handshaking
The exchange of predetermined codes and signals (tones) to establish a connection
between two modems.
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control. A communications protocol defined by ISO.
hidden choice indicator
A symbol appearing in the upper right-hand corner of the LCD, indicating that more
selections are available than what appears on the LCD.
host
A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of
the network.
Hz
A unit of frequency (hertz) that equals one cycle per second.
idle
A state in which the modem’s operating parameters can be modified or commands can be
issued to the modem using either AT commands or the DCP.
ITU-T
The Telecommunications Standardization Sector of the International
Telecommunications Union, an advisory committee established by the United Nations to
recommend communications standards and policies. Before March 1993 it was called
CCITT.
JM8
A jack used for leased-line networks. Pins 1 and 2 are the transmit pair and Pins 7 and 8
are the receive pair.
keypad
A set of seven keys surrounding the DCP’s LCD. These keys are used to select
configuration options and to maneuver through the DCP.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Glossary-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display. A thin sandwich of two sealed glass plates containing liquid
crystal material. When voltage is applied, the amount of light able to pass through the
glass plates is altered so that messages may be ‘‘written” on the display.
leased line
A private line connection exclusively for the user. No dialing is necessary.
LED
Light-Emitting Diode. A light or status indicator on the DCP that glows in response to
the presence of a certain condition (e.g., Alrm).
local analog loopback
The modem’s transmit VF signal is looped to its receiver.
long space disconnect
A disconnect can occur if the modem receives an extended space from a remote modem;
for example, when a remote modem is commanded to disconnect, it transmits a
continuous space to the modem before disconnecting.
loopback test
Any test that verifies a device’s integrity by connecting the device’s output of one
direction to the device’s input of the other direction, then checking the received signal for
errors.
LSD
Line Signal Detect. A signal between the DTE and modem indicating energy exists on
the transmission circuit.
menu tree
The structure containing the 3800Plus menu hierarchy starting at a Top-Level menu and
extending down to various modem functions.
MNP
This protocol (Microcom Networking Protocol) detects and corrects data errors caused
by telephone line noise and signal distortion. MNP5 includes data compression.
modem
(Modulator/DEModulator). A device that transforms signals from digital to analog form
and vice versa.
modulation
The process of varying some characteristics (usually amplitude, frequency, and/or phase)
of a carrier wave to form data transmissions.
network
A communications circuit.
network address
The customer-assigned diagnostic address of a tributary modem.
NIM
Network Interface Module. The interface provided, up to two per carrier, for the public
switched telephone network (PSTN) used by 3811Plus modems.
NMS
Network Management System. A set of diagnostic and configuration management tools
for a data communication network, consisting of software programs and dedicated
computer hardware.
off-hook
The condition of a telephone or modem that is being used to establish or maintain
communication.
offline
The condition of a modem that is not connected to another modem.
on-hook
The condition of a telephone or modem that is not being used.
online
The condition of a modem that is connected to and communicating with another modem.
Glossary-6
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Glossary
Originate mode
The modem is in a state where it is ready to transmit a call. In a dial network, it is the
modem that makes the call. In a leased-line network, it is one of two sides of the network
that is selected to be the originating modem.
parity
A way of checking data accuracy by counting the number of bits that have a value of
one.
PBX
Telephone switching equipment (Private Branch Exchange) dedicated to one customer. A
PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network.
permissive interface
A dial modem operating mode characterized by a fixed output power level of –9 dBm.
physical address
The diagnostic address of a control modem derived from its location in the carrier: its
carrier and slot number.
power-up self-test
A test that checks most hardware components when the modem is powered-on.
product code
A three-digit code indicating the modem’s highest VF data rate.
protocol
The rules for timing, format, error control, and flow control during data transmission.
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network. A network shared among many users who can use
telephones to establish connections between two points. Also known as dial network.
pulse dialing
One of two dialing methods, in which telephone numbers are sent as pulses (brief
changes in voltage or current intensity) across the telephone line. Rotary telephones use
pulse dialing.
register
A part of the modem’s memory that contains values that determine the modem’s
operating characteristics.
Remote
A branch of the Top-Level menu that permits access to the DCP of another modem.
remote loopback
A test that sends a signal to the remote modem to test the local modem, the remote
modem, and the circuit between them.
remote mode indicator
An inverse video that indicates the modems are operating in Remote mode.
result code
An asynchronous message (in either numbers or words) that the modem sends to the
DTE after executing or trying to execute a command.
Return to Dial
A function available when in Dial Backup mode that allows the modem to switch to
dial-line operation when currently on leased lines.
RJ11C
A type of 6-position jack normally used with permissive dial networks and telephone
sets.
RJ21X
A type of 50-position jack normally used with permissive dial networks providing the
appropriate conductors for up to eight telephone lines.
rotary
A TELCO service whereby multiple lines to a customer premise share a common
telephone number.
RS-232D
An Electronic Industries Association’s standard defining the 25-position interface
between data terminal equipment and data communications equipment.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Glossary-7
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
SDCP
Shared Diagnostic Control Panel. An optional user interface similar to the front panel of
a 3810Plus modem that attaches to the front of a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier.
Installed at eye level into one COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, it controls and
monitors modems in all the carriers in the cabinet. A single SDCP can control up to
8 carriers, with a total of 128 modems.
SDU
Shared Diagnostic Unit. A circuit card installed in Slot 0 of the COMSPHERE 3000
Series Carrier that provides an interface between an optional SDCP and/or network
management and 3811Plus modems.
Select key
An SDCP key that allows the selection of a specific card slot in the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier.
serial transmission
A way of transmitting data in which bits are sent sequentially one at a time.
Shared Diagnostic Unit
(SDU)
A circuit card that plugs into a dedicated slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier to
provide the SDCP and network management interfaces to the dial modems in the carrier.
It translates the network management protocol to the devices in the carrier and routes
incoming messages to the appropriate slots.
S-Registers
Registers that contains information affecting the modem parameters. All S-Registers
must be preceded by the AT prefix.
Sync Dial
A factory preset configuration area containing configuration options most often used in
synchronous dial networks.
synchronous
transmission
Data transmission that is synchronized by timing signals. Characters are sent at a fixed
rate. This type of transmission is more efficient than asynchronous transmission.
ter
Latin for ‘‘thrice’’ Used to distinguish the third version of a standard from other versions;
e.g., V.27 ter.
terbo
See V.32terbo.
tone dialing
One of two dialing methods, in which telephone numbers are sent as tones across the
telephone lines.
Top-Level menu
The very top of the menu tree that displays modem status and all Top-Level menu
branches.
training
A process where two modems try to establish a connection over the VF line.
UL
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
UNIX Dial
A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used
in a UNIXr dial network.
USOC
Universal Service Ordering Codes.
VF
Voice Frequency. The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound
(usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz). This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal.
V.17
A fax communications standard for modems operating half-duplex with synchronous
data at 14,400 bps.
Glossary-8
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Glossary
V.22
A standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at
1200 bps over the dial network (PSTN).
V.22bis
A standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at
1200 or 2400 bps over the dial network (PSTN).
V.27bis
A communications standard for modems operating in synchronous mode at 4800 or
2400 bps.
V.27ter
A fax communications standard for modems operating half-duplex with synchronous
data at 2400 and 4800 bps.
V.29
A communications standard for modems operating half-duplex with synchronous data at
7200 and 9600 bps.
V.32
A standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at
4800 or 9600 bps on switched (dial) or leased telephone lines.
V.32bis
A standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data
over dial networks (PSTN) or leased lines at 14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, or 4800 bps.
V.32terbo
A proprietary standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or
synchronous data over dial networks (PSTN) or leased lines at 19,200 or 16,800 bps. The
terbo is a pun on turbo and ter; the next iteration of the V.32 recommendation, had one
been finalized, would have been V.32 ter.
V.33
A communications standard for modems operating half-duplex with synchronous data at
14,400 and 12,000 bps.
V.34
A standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data
over dial networks (PSTN) or two-wire leased lines at 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600,
19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, or 2400 bps.
V.42
CCITT standard for error control protocol.
V.42bis
CCITT standard for data compression.
V.54
CCITT standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests.
XOFF
A character that tells the DTE or modem to stop transmitting data.
XON
A character that tells the DTE or modem to start or resume transmitting data.
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Glossary-9
Index
A
A/ (Repeat Last Command), 13-3
Abort (Test branch), 7-2
ac power
connection, 2-5
requirements, D-3
Access from Remote, 8-40
Active (Operating) configuration area, 8-1
Active (Saved) configuration area, 8-1
Administrative Password, 11-4, 11-10
Answer, 5-3
Answer Access security, 11-2
Answer Access Security Mode, 8-43
Answer Security, 11-8
any-key abort, 5-2, 13-3, 13-4
Asymmetric Rate Mode, 13-16
AT Command Mode, 8-17
AT commands
″H (V.42bis Compression), 8-32, 13-13
&C (LSD Control), 8-12, 13-7
&D (DTR Action), 8-9, 13-7
&F (Factory Defaults), 13-8
&G (V.22bis Guard Tone), 8-25, 13-8
&I (Dial Transmit Level), 13-9
&J (Dial Transmit Type), 8-25, 13-9
&L (Leased Mode), 8-27, 13-9
&M (Async/Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type), 8-7,
8-14, 13-10
&Q (Async/Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type), 8-7,
8-14, 13-10
&R (RTS Action), 8-11, 13-10
&S (DSR Control), 8-10, 13-10
&T (Test), 13-11
&T0 (Abort Test), 7-2
&T1 (Local Analog Loopback), 7-3
&T2 (Pattern Test), 7-7
&T3 (Local Digital Loopback), 7-5
&T4, &T5 (Receive Remote Loopback Response),
8-37
&T6 (Remote Digital Loopback), 7-4
&T9 (Self-Test), 7-2
&V (View Configuration Options), 13-11
&W (Save to Memory), 13-11
&X (Transmit Clock Source), 8-13, 13-11
&Z (Store Telephone Numbers), 5-5, 13-11
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
%A (Error Control Fallback Character), 8-33, 13-13
%C (MNP5 Compression), 8-32, 13-13
+FCLASS (Service Class Selection), 13-13
\A (Maximum Frame Size), 8-35, 13-12
\C (Error Control Negotiate Buffer), 8-32, 13-12
\D (CTS Control), 8-11, 13-12
\G (Modem-to-Modem Flow Control), 8-34, 13-12
\K (Break Buffer Control, Send Break Control, Break
Forces Escape), 8-15, 8-34, 8-35, 13-12
\N (Error Control Mode), 8-31, 13-12
\Q (Flow Control of DTE, Flow Control of Modem),
8-33, 13-13
\T (No Data Disconnect Timer), 8-21, 13-13
\X (XON/XOFF Passthrough), 8-34, 13-13
A (Answer Mode), 5-3, 13-3
D (Dial), 5-6, 13-3
DS (Dial Stored Number), 5-2, 13-4
E (Command Character Echo), 8-15, 13-4
echo, C-2
format, 13-2
H (Hook Switch Control), 5-3, 13-4
I (Identification), 6-3, 13-4
L (Speaker Volume), 8-40, 13-5
list of, 13-2
M (Speaker Control), 8-39, 13-5
O (Online mode), 13-5
Q (Result Codes), 8-16, 13-5
Sr? (Display S-Register Value), 13-5
Sr=n (Change S-Register), 13-5
using to change factory presets, 4-11
V (Result Codes Format), 8-17, 13-5
X (Extended Result Codes, Dial Tone Detect, Busy
Tone Detect), 8-16, 8-19, 8-20, 13-6
Y (Long Space Disconnect), 8-21, 13-6
Z (Reset and Load Active), 13-6
AT Escape Character, 8-15
Auto Dial Standby, 8-30
Auto Redial, 8-30, 13-17
Auto-Answer Ring Count, 8-19
Automatic Firmware Download Center, 9-6
Automatic Make Busy, 8-21
automatic redialing, 8-18, 8-22, 8-30, 13-17
Automode (Dial Line), 8-24, 13-23
Autorate (Dial Line), 8-24, 13-23
Autorate (Leased Line), 8-28, 13-24
Index-1
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
connection
ac power, 2-5
COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS, 2-5
dial-line, 2-4
DTE, 2-3
leased-line, 2-4, 2-5
Control branch, 9-1
CT111 Rate Control, 8-13, 13-21
CTS Control (\D), 8-11, 13-12
Customer configuration areas, 8-1
B
Backspace Character, 8-16
Bad Lines Auto Originate, 8-29
Blind Dial Pause, 8-19
Break Buffer Control, 8-34
Break Forces Escape, 8-15
Busy Tone Detect, 8-20
C
cables
auxiliary, E-4
crossover, E-4
Call Answer commands (V.25bis), F-3
Call Request commands (V.25bis), F-2
Call Setup branch, 5-1
Carriage Return Character, 8-15
Carrier On Level, 8-30
cellular, 13-8, 13-9
Cellular (Mobile), 8-41, 13-8
Cellular (PSTN), 13-8
Cellular Enhancement, 8-36
Cellular RJ11 Adapt, 8-41
Change Directory, 5-4
character format, 13-2, C-4
Choose Function, 8-4
Clone to Remote, 9-4
Command Character Echo, 8-15
command entry guidelines, 13-2
Command mode, 13-1
command responses (V.25bis), F-4
compression
MNP5, 13-13
V.42bis, 13-13
COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS, 1-1
connection, 2-5
configuration options, 8-7–8-43
Dial Line, 8-23
DTE Interface, 8-7
editing and saving, 8-5
error control, 8-31
factory default, G-1
for cellular, 13-8, 13-9
Leased Line, 8-27
Line Dialer, 8-19
Miscellaneous, 8-39
saving, 13-11
Security, 8-42
selecting, 4-11
Tests, 8-37
V.42/MNP/Buffer, 8-31
viewing, 13-11
Configure branch, 8-4
connect messages, B-1
Index-2
D
D-Lead signaling, 8-22
Data Bits, 8-8
Data mode, 13-1
data rates supported, D-2
DCP (Diagnostic Control Panel), 2-1
description, 4-1
Hidden Choice Indicators, 4-4
keypad, 4-5
operation, 4-4
security access, 4-13
shared, 4-2
types, 4-1
using to change factory presets, 4-11
default configuration options, 4-11, G-1
setting with AT commands, 4-11
setting with DCP, 4-11
Dial, 5-2
dial backup, C-4
Dial Command modifiers, 13-3
“!” (hook flash), 5-6
“,” (pause), 5-6
“;” (return to Command mode), 5-6
P (Pulse dial), 5-6, 8-19, 13-3
R (Reverse), 5-6
T (Tone dial), 5-6, 8-19, 13-3
W (Wait), 5-6
dial line connection, 2-4
Dial Line Rate, 8-23, 13-18
Dial Standby/Return to Dial, 5-3
Dial Tone Detect, 8-19
Dial Transmit Level (&I), 13-9
Dial Transmit Level Type (&J), 13-9
Dialer Type, 8-19
dimensions, D-3
Directory Location 1 Callback, 8-40
disabled commands, 8-39
Disconnect, 5-2
display configuration options (&V), 13-11
Download Code, 9-4
download failure, 9-6
download latest firmware, 9-6
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Index
DSR Control (&S), 8-10, 13-10
DTE connection, 2-3
DTE Dialer Type, 8-14
DTE Interface, 8-7, D-3
DTE LL (CT141), 13-20
DTE Local Loopback, 8-37
DTE Rate, 8-7
DTE Rate=VF Rate, 8-13
DTE rates supported, D-2
DTE Remote Loopback, 8-37
DTE RL (CT140), 13-20
DTE status, 6-4
DTE-side password
backspace character, 8-43
number of tries, 8-42
termination character, 8-42
DTR Action (&D), 8-9, 13-7
DTR Alarm Reporting, 8-41, 13-23
DTR Auto Redial, 8-22
DTR Continuous Repeat, 8-18, 13-17
E
Edit Password Table, 11-5
Edit Strap Group, 8-4
End (DCP option), 8-6
Enhanced Throughput Cellular (ETC), 8-25, 13-9
Entry Wait Time, 8-42
equipment
customer-supplied, 2-2, 3-1
in modem package, 2-1, 3-1
Erase All Passwords, 11-11
error codes (result codes), B-1
error control, 8-31
Error Control Fallback Character, 8-33
Error Control Mode (\N), 8-31, 13-12
Error Control Negotiate Buffer, 8-32
Escape Character, 8-15
Escape Guard Time, 8-15
escape sequence (+++), 13-1
Extended Result Codes, 8-16
firmware upgrade, 9-4, 9-6
flow control
modem to modem, 13-12
of modem and DTE, 8-33, 13-13
XON/XOFF, 8-33, 13-13
Flow Control of DTE, 8-33
Flow Control of Modem, 8-33
Front Panel Security Access, 4-13
G
Get_User_ID, 8-43
H
heat dissipation, D-3
Hidden Choice Indicators, 4-4
hook flash (!), 13-3
I
Identity, 6-3
installation
carrier mount, 3-2
standalone, 2-2
K
keypad, 4-5
L
LCD display, 4-4
LdEditAreafrm, 8-4
Leased Line mode, 13-9
Leased Line Rate, 8-28, 13-19
Leased Line Transmit Level, 8-29
Leased Mode, 8-27
leased-line connection, 2-4, 2-5
LEDs, 4-2
Line Dialer, 8-19
Linefeed Character, 8-16
Local Analog Loop, 7-3
Local Digital Loop, 7-5
locking the DCP, 4-13
Long Space Disconnect, 8-21
LSD Control, 8-12
F
Factory configuration area, 8-1
factory default templates, 4-11, 8-1
Fall Forward Delay, 8-26, 8-30
Fast Disconnect, 8-20
fax
+FCLASS command, 13-13
modulations supported, D-2
operation, 12-1
types supported, 1-2, 12-1
features, 1-1
firmware download, 9-6
firmware release number, 13-4
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Index-3
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
pause during dialing (,), 13-4
Pause Time (for “,” dial modifier), 8-20
PBX, C-3
pin assignments
EIA-232-D, E-2
VF Connector, E-3
power consumption, D-3
power-up procedure, 2-6
primary channel, 10-2
M
Make Busy, 9-3
Make Busy Via DTR, 8-22, 13-22
Maximum Frame Size, 8-35
menu tree, A-1
overview, 4-6
remote, 10-3
messages, 4-7
MI/MIC Dialing, 8-22
MNP5 Compression, 8-32
models, 1-2
carrier-mounted, 3-1
standalone, 2-1
Modem-to-Modem Flow Control, 8-34
Modulation (Dial Line configuration option), 8-23
Modulation (Leased Line configuration option), 8-27
modulations supported, D-2
Q
quiet answer (@), 13-3
R
Rate Auto Originate, 8-29
Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay, 8-35
Receive Remote Loopback, 8-37
Record (Status branch), 6-4
redialing, automatic, 8-18, 8-22, 8-30, 13-17
Remote Access Password, 8-40
Remote branch, 10-1
Remote Digital Loop, 7-4
Remote Mode Indicator, 4-5
remote modem Top-Level menu, 10-3
repeat last command (A/), 13-2, 13-3
replacing modems, 2-6, 3-2, 3-4
Reset, 9-2
Reset Security, 11-10
Result Codes
enable/disable, 8-16, 13-5
extended, 13-6
format, 8-17, 13-5
result codes, B-1
return to command mode (;), 13-4
Reverse Dial mode (R), 13-3
RTS Action (&R), 8-11, 13-10
RTS/CTS Delay, 8-12, 13-16
N
Network Management Address, 8-40
Network Position, 8-41
NMS Call Messages, 8-41
NMS DTR Alarm, 8-41
NMS_Reporting, 8-43
No Answer Timeout, 8-20
No Carrier Disconnect, 8-21
No Data Disconnect, 8-21
Nxt (DCP option), 8-6
O
operating modes, 13-1
optional features, 1-2
Options (Status branch), 6-4
Originate Access security, 11-2
Originate Security, 8-43, 11-9
P
Parity Bit, 8-8
password
Administrative, 11-4, 11-10
Answer Access, 11-11
combination, 11-3
database, 11-12
DTE-side, 11-3
entry, 11-11
examples, 11-12
number of DTE password tries, 8-42
Originate Access, 11-12
remote access, 8-40
Table, 11-5
VF-side, 11-2
Password Table, 11-5
Pattern (Test branch), 7-6
Index-4
S
S-registers, 13-14
changing, 13-5
displaying, 13-5
format, 13-14
S0 (Auto-Answer Ring Number), 8-19, 13-14
S2 (AT Escape Character), 8-15, 13-14
S3 (Carriage Return Character), 8-15, 13-14
S4 (Line Feed Character), 8-16, 13-15
S5 (Backspace Character), 8-16, 13-15
S6 (Blind Dial Pause), 8-19, 13-15
S7 (No Answer Timeout), 8-20, 13-15
S8 (“,” Pause Time), 8-20, 13-15
S10 (No Carrier Disconnect), 8-21, 13-15
S12 (Escape Guard Time), 8-15, 13-15
S14 (Asymmetric Rate Mode), 13-16
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Index
S18 (Test Timeout), 8-37, 13-16
S26 (RTS/CTS Delay), 8-12, 13-16
S36 (Rate Auto Originate), 8-29, 13-16
S37 (Auto Redial), 8-22, 8-30, 13-17
S38 (DTR Continuous Repeat), 8-18, 13-17
S39 (Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay), 8-35, 13-17
S40 (Auto Make Busy), 8-21, 13-17
S41 (Dial Line Rate), 13-18
S43 (Train Time), 8-25, 13-18
S44 (Leased Line Rate), 8-23, 8-28, 13-19
S45 (Leased Line Transmit Level), 8-29, 13-19
S46 (Bad Lines Auto Originate), 8-29, 13-19
S47 (Auto Dial Standby), 8-30, 13-20
S48 (Leased-Line Carrier On Level), 8-30, 13-20
S49 (Transmit Buffer Disconnect Delay), 8-35, 13-20
S51 (DTE Remote Loopback), 8-37, 13-20
S52 (DTE Local Loopback), 8-37, 13-20
S53 (V.54 Address), 8-38, 13-21
S54 (V.54 Device Type), 13-21
S55 (Access from Remote), 8-40, 13-21
S56–S59 (Remote Access Password), 8-40, 13-21
S61 (CT111 Rate Control), 8-13, 13-21
S62 (V.25bis Coding), 8-17, 13-22
S63 (V.25bis Idle Character), 8-18, 13-22
S64 (V.25bis New Line Character), 8-18, 13-22
S66 (NMS Call Messages), 8-41, 13-22
S67 (Directory Location 1 Callback), 8-40, 13-22
S69 (Make Busy Via DTR), 8-22, 13-22
S74 (Network Position Identifier), 8-41, 13-23
S75 (Network Management Address), 8-40, 13-23
S76 (Autorate), 8-24, 13-23
S77 (DTR Alarm Reporting), 8-41, 13-23
S78 (Automode), 8-24, 13-23
S80 (No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal), 13-24
S82 (Autorate), 8-28, 13-24
S83 (MI/MIC Dialing), 8-22, 13-24
S84 (AT Command Mode), 8-17, 13-24
S85 (Fast Disconnect), 8-20, 13-24
S88 (Straps When Disconnected), 8-39, 13-25
S89 (V.42 ARQ Window Size Increase), 13-25
S90 (DTE Rate = VF Rate), 8-13, 13-25
S91 (Cellular Enhancements), 8-36, 13-25
S92 (V.29 Train On Data), 13-26
S93 (Cellular RJ11 Adapt), 8-41, 13-26
SDCP (Shared Diagnostic Control Panel), 3-1
SDU (Shared Diagnostic Unit), 3-1
secondary channel, 10-2
Security branch, 11-4
Security configuration options, 8-42
security messages, 4-7
Self (Test branch), 7-2
self-test, 7-2
Send Break Control, 8-35
serial number, 13-4
Service Line, 9-3
Set Access Control, 11-4
Set Administrative Password, 11-10
Set Answer Security, 11-8
Set Originate Security, 11-9
setting factory defaults, 4-11
Speaker Control, 8-39, 9-2
Speaker Volume, 8-40
status, 4-7
Status branch, 6-1
status indicators, 4-2
Stop Bits, 8-8
store telephone number (&Z), 13-11
Straps When Disconnected, 8-39
T
technical specifications, D-1
telephone interface, D-3
telephone numbers, entering, 5-5
Test branch, 7-2
Test Timeout, 8-37
tests (&T), 13-11
top-level menu, 4-7
Train Time, 8-25
Transmit Buffer Disconnect Delay, 8-35
Transmit Clock Source, 8-13
transmit level, D-3
dial, 13-9
leased line, 13-19
troubleshooting, C-1
U
UNIX, G-1, G-2
upgrade instructions, 9-6
3980-A2-GB30-20
November 1996
Index-5
COMSPHERE 3800Plus Modems
V
W
V.22bis Guard Tone, 8-25
V.25bis Coding, 8-17, 13-22
V.25bis commands, F-4
V.25bis dialing commands and responses, F-1
V.25bis Idle Character, 13-22
V.25bis Idle Fill, 8-18
V.25bis New Line Character, 8-18, 13-22
V.25bis response messages, F-5
V.29 Train On Data, 13-26
V.42 ARQ WIndow Size, 13-25
V.42bis Compression, 8-32
V.54 Address, 8-38, 13-21
V.54 Device Type, 8-38, 13-21
VF line requirements, D-3
VF Prompt Type, 8-42
VF rate, 13-18
VF rates supported, D-2
VF status, 6-2
view configuration options (&V), 13-11
Index-6
wait for dial tone (W or +), 13-3
X
XON/XOFF Passthrough, 8-34
November 1996
3980-A2-GB30-20
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising